Installation PDF

FP85-104 S1
Installation Manual
NWA-041677-001
ISSUE 1.0
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC Infrontia Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC Infrontia Corporation has prepared this document for use by its
employees and customers. The information contained herein is the
property of NEC Infrontia Corporation, and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval from NEC Infrontia Corporation.
All brand names and product names on this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright 2008
NEC Infrontia Corporation
PRODUCT LIABILITY
PRODUCT LIABILITY
1. USING THE EQUIPMENT SAFELY
The following safety information describes how to avoid injuries while working with the equipment and how to
prevent damage to the equipment. Learn the meaning of the following symbols and then read this section
carefully before using the equipment.
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
DANGER
Incorrect use of the equipment may cause personal injury or death.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the equipment may cause personal injury or a serious
system fault.
ATTENTION
Incorrect use of the equipment may limit the system performance or
cause the system to fail.
The telephone system can only be used in NEC-designated countries.

If a system-down, malfunction, defect or external factor such as an electrical failure indirectly causes a loss of profit, the
company (or affiliates) will not be held responsible.
The goal is to produce a comprehensive and accurate manual. However, if errors or omissions are found in this manual,
please notify NEC Infrontia Corporation.
If the system requires installation or repair, contact the dealer or its service technician.
Carefully read all the manuals that relate to the system.
PL- 1
PRODUCT LIABILITY
2. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
The following describes the safety considerations that must be observed before using the system, the powerrelated equipment and the peripheral equipment, such as consoles, the Main Distribution Frame (MDF),
telephones, PCs, printers, etc.
DANGER
If the system emits smoke or a burning, acrid odor, immediately turn off the system power.
Operating the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure. After
turning off the power and confirming that the smoke has disappeared, contact the dealer.
If any equipment, such as the system, the main power source, a cabinet or peripheral equipment tips
over, turn off the power and contact the dealer.
If liquid reaches the inside of the system or the main power source, turn off the power. Operating
the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure.
PW
Do not touch the internal parts of the main power source to disassemble or configure it. This action
may cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure.
NEC Infrontia Corporation does not take any responsibility for disassembled or reconfigured
equipment.
Do not put any container objects (such as a vase or a cup) on the main power source or any
peripheral equipment. It might cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure.
Do not tamper with, modify, forcefully bend, forcefully remove or twist an electrical cord or any
wiring to or from the system, the main power source or any peripheral equipment. It might cause a
fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure. If the wiring is damaged, contact the dealer.
PWR
dust
Correctly insert all of the electrical plugs into the electrical outlets. Before inserting a plug into an
electrical outlet, ensure that there is no dust on the plugs blades. If there is dust on a blade, it might
cause a fire.
Do not use power other than the power that was designated for the system when it was installed.
PL- 2
PRODUCT LIABILITY
DANGER
PWR
Do not attempt to repair or move the main power source without assistance from the dealer.
Do not put any metal or combustible objects into a vent of the system, the main power source, or
any peripheral equipment. Operating the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock,
or a system failure. If this occurs, turn off the power and contact the dealer.
Be careful when using any peripheral equipments Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). If the liquid
leaks, it can be harmful to the user and to the system.
Before connecting any non-NEC, customer-provided equipment, check with the supplier to ensure
that the equipment is compatible. If the supplier cannot confirm the compatibility, do not connect
the equipment. Connecting incompatible equipment might cause a fire or an electrical shock.
PL- 3
PRODUCT LIABILITY
WARNING
Do not place any object on the system or the main power source. If the object falls, it might cause
personal injury or damage to the equipment.
When removing a plug from an outlet, be sure to grip the plug, not the cord. Gripping the cord to
remove the plug could cause a fire or an electrical shock to occur.
If lightning causes a fault, contact the dealer.
Provide the appropriate temperature, humidity, and ventilation on an around-the-clock basis. For
example, at a height that is one meter (3.28 feet) above the floor, the temperature should be between
20 C and 25 C (68 F to 77 F) and the humidity should be approximately 50%.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Take appropriate anti-static measures so that the other end of the anti-static kit can be connected to
the metal part of the frame.
PL- 4
PRODUCT LIABILITY
WARNING
Observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries:

The systems emergency back-up battery may be a rechargeable lead battery. Check the
emergency battery for an electrical failure.
Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful to human skin and eyes. If battery acid
contacts skin, wash the affected area with soap and water. If battery acid contacts the eyes,
flush the eyes with water. In either event, seek medical attention. If there is battery acid on a
cloth, use water to wash the battery acid from the cloth.
Do not intentionally short batteries. Do not put the battery near a fire or in a fire. Do not
disassemble the battery, drop it or knock it against another object.
The batterys life expectancy is affected by its environment. The normal battery life is
approximately three years. If the battery is used in an outdoor setting and is exposed to high
temperatures, its life expectancy drops to approximately one year.
Perform periodic diagnostic tests and maintenance procedures on the emergency battery and
its terminals to ensure their readiness. If there is a power failure and the emergency battery is
not ready, then the system will not work. Additionally, a damaged or dead battery, or terminals
that need replacement might cause battery acid to leak, which might cause smoke or a fire.
The battery and terminals are periodic replacement parts (the cost is chargeable to the
customer). A service contract, with the supplier or service technician, to perform routine
maintenance for the battery is recommended.
Do not touch peripheral equipment with wet hands. Do not allow any liquid to touch any of the
peripheral equipment.
Do not touch the printers internal components when replacing disposables such as a cartridge or a
ribbon. Ensure that the printer is turned off and that it is not hot in order to prevent burns from any
accidental contact with the internal components.
Do not drop the peripheral equipment or knock it against another object. These actions might cause
an equipment failure.
PL- 5
PRODUCT LIABILITY
ATTENTION
Do not use benzine, thinner or alcohol for cleaning. When removing dust and dirt, put diluted, mild
detergent on a cloth and then wring out the cloth. Remove the dust and dirt with the cloth and then
wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth.
Thinner
Do not place any equipment in the following environments:

Locations that are exposed to direct sunlight
Locations where the moisture level exceeds the allowed level
Locations where the equipment might be exposed to water, oil, and chemicals
Locations with very low temperatures, such as in a walk-in cooler or freezer
Locations that are exposed to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from devices such as
television sets and two-way radios
Locations that receive illegal electric waves
The life expectancies of the system and the main power source will be shortened if placed in a
location that is affected by hydrogen sulfide or salt, such as a seaside area.
2.1 Installation Environment
Consider the following items before the installation.

2.1.1
Stability
WARNING
2.1.2
Install the system with anchor bolts to prevent constant movement or vibration, such as from a
nearby motor or automatic door, and to resist catastrophic movement from natural disasters, such
as an earthquake. If the system moves or falls, an injury could occur.
Floor, Wall and Ceiling
WARNING
The wall and ceiling materials must be resistant to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) and provide heat
insulation. Since the batterys life expectancy depends on the ambient temperature, the room where
the battery is installed must be well ventilated and vented to the outside. Check the battery
specifications to determine if the battery can or cannot be installed near a motor or a power
transformer.
The floor material that is under and around the system must be resistant to ESD.
2.1.3
Windows
ATTENTION
Keep all of the windows closed if the location is affected by dust, sea breeze or corrosive gas.
Curtains or blinds are necessary to avoid direct sunlight.
PL- 6
PRODUCT LIABILITY
2.1.4
Fire Extinguisher
WARNING
2.1.5
Place a fire extinguisher for electrical fires (such as a carbon-gas fire extinguisher or a halon-gas
fire extinguisher) near the system. It is recommended that the room also be equipped with an
automatic fire-detection system. In the event of smoke and fire, turn off the main power source and
the backup battery, then use the fire extinguisher to put out the fire while trying to avoid inhaling
any smoke.
Safety Environment
WARNING
Consider measures to deal with disasters (such as fires, floods and earthquakes) and to ensure the
safety of the staff.
Regularly clean the room or rooms where the switching equipment resides.
Do not spray any insecticides directly on the equipment (insecticides can adversely affect the
switching equipment).
2.1.6
Air Conditioning Facilities

The system and the air conditioning system must be installed separately and have separate power
sources.
WARNING
To prevent an electromagnetic arc from causing noise, attach a surge-limiting capacitor and resistor
on the air conditioners electromagnetic switchs coil.
It might be necessary to adjust the ventilation so the air conditioning is equally effective throughout
the equipment room.
Do not place the system in a location where condensation might fall from an air conditioner or a
duct.
Do not place the system in a location where hot and humid air is exhausted, as this might damage
the system.
2.1.7
Lightning Strikes
WARNING
The grounding system must protect the system, MDF, main power source, MAT, printer, modems,
etc. from damage caused by lightning strikes and electrical surges.
All the grounding conductors must have a resistance of less than one to bring a zero-voltage
reference to the system components.
To achieve this, the following ground conductors must connect to the Primary Ground Bar:
The Earth Ground (E) from the Rectifier
The Frame Ground (FE) from the system
The Power Ground (PE) from the system, through the Rectifier
The Frame Ground (FE) from the MDF
The AC service outlets, with AC 100 V plug outlets, for the MAT, printer, modems and any
measurement devices, such as a protocol analyzer.
PL- 7
2.2 Disposables and Periodic-replacement Parts
ATTENTION
Many parts, such as fans, batteries, backup batteries, hard disks, fuses and displays need to be
replaced on a periodic basis. In the event of sudden traffic, a part that is past due for replacement
might lead to a system failure and damage to the system.
Replace the disposable items such as ink ribbons, printer cartridges, floppy disks, recording paper
and headsets as needed.
A service contract with the dealer or its service technician to monitor the replacement cycles and to
supply the replacement parts and the necessary disposables is recommended.
PL- 8
REGULATORY NOTICE (For North America)

1. CUSTOMER INFORMATION FOR TELEPHONE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (TTE)
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format:
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. When such changes affect the compatibility or use of the UNIVERGE SV8500 system, the telephone company is required to give
adequate notice of the changes in order for you to maintain uninterrupted service.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive
RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but
not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may
be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products
approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is the product identifier in format:
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN
of 0.3).
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utilities commission, public
service commission or corporation commission for information.
For single and two-line equipment that connects to the telephone network via a plug and jack, the plug and jack
used with this equipment must comply with FCC Part 68 rules.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord
and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack
that is also compliant.
1.1
TELEPHONE/SERVICE PROVIDER COMPANY NOTIFICATION
Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone network, the following information must be provided
to the telephone company:
Your telephone number.
FCC registration number:
For SV8500 system, use the following number:

FCC Product Identifier: US:NIFMF21BSN8153, US:NIFPF21BSN8153, US:NIFKF21BSN8153
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 2.1B
USOC jacks required: RJ21X, RJ2EX, RJ2GX
REGULATORY
R-1
1.2
INCIDENCE OF HARM
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint
with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain interrupted service.
1.3
REPAIR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
If equipment malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by an authorized agent of NEC Unified Solutions,
Inc. or by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. The user requiring service is responsible for reporting the need for service to an NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. authorized agent or to NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
1.4
PRIVATE (LEASED) LINES
For Private (Leased) Line (Analog Data Format) equipment, type JM8 jack is required. Refer to ATIS Technical Report No. 5 for details on this connector.
The Facility Interface Code (FIC) associated with each private line application represents the type of service
that will be provided by the telephone company. The user instructions must contain a detailed list of private
line ports and the associated FICs for which the equipment has been approved. In addition, the Service Order
Code (SOC) must also be included for analog systems. The SOC indicates the degree of network protection
provided by the equipment,.
For Private (Leased) Line (Digital Format) equipment, in addition to the general requirements for all equipment, certain digital connections require that an encoded analog content and billing protection affidavit be provided the telephone company. Customer instructions must contain information on the preparation and
submission of the affidavit.
To comply with state tariffs, the telephone company must be given notification prior to connection. In some
states, the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission must give prior approval of connection.
1.5
TOLL RESTRICTION AND LEAST COST ROUTING EQUIPMENT
The consumer/purchaser/supplier instructions accompanying this equipment and/or software features must
contain the following notice:
The software contained in the UNIVERGE SV8500 to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
REGULATORY
R-2
Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customers employees from gaining access to the network and these
codes.
1.6
DIRECT INWARD DIALING
Note: ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE
FOR PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC RULES.

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) must contain the following:
Proper Answer Supervision is when this equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls are:
Answered by the called station.
Answered by the Attendant.
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE)
user.
Routed to a dial prompt.
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Permissible exceptions are:
A call is unanswered.
A busy tone is received.
A reorder tone is received.
1.7
VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT/MONITORING OVER DID LINES
When using voice announcement or monitoring over DID Lines, observe the following.
CAUTION
Using the Voice Announcement feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at the other end of the telephone line may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor before implementing any practice to monitor or record a telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require
a party monitoring or recording a telephone to use a beep-tone(s), notify all parties to the telephone conversation and/or obtain consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. In monitoring or recording
sound activities at the other end of the telephone line using the Voice Announcement feature, the sound of
the alert tone at the beginning of the Voice Announcement may or may not be considered sufficient under
applicable laws. Some of the applicable laws provide for strict penalties for illegal monitoring or recording of telephone conversations.
REGULATORY
R-3
1.8
EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
If equipment such as Private Branch Exchanges (PBX), key systems or customer-owned coin/credit card telephones is sold to a call aggregator, it must be capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block
access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
1.9
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY
Parties responsible for equipment requiring AC power should consider including an advisory notice in their
customer information suggesting the customer use a surge arrestor. Telephone companies report that electrical
surges, typically lightening transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC
power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem.
1.10 HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones that are provided for this system are hearing aid
compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of
hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible
telephones.
1.11 MUSIC ON HOLD
Note: "In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Com-
posers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold feature of this telecommunication system. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.,
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license."
2. RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules, the following statement is provided:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pur-
suant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Note: Modifying this equipment without an approval from NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. may void your author-
ity granted by the FCC to operate the equipment.

3. SAFETY INFORMATION
This equipment has been certified by Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all applicable
requirements:
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M General Requirements Canadian Electrical Code, Part II
REGULATORY
R-4
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Part l: General Requirements
UL 60950-1-SAFETY, 1st Edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment Part I: General Requirements
4. INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS

Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to be directly connected to the telephone network. Prior to the connection or disconnection of this telephone system to or from the telephone network, the telephone company must be provided with the following information.
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada Technical Specifications/Le present material est conforme
aux specifications techniques applicables dindustrie Canada.
(1) Your telephone number.
(2) IC registration number: IC: 140L-SN8153
(3) Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment: 2.1
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of
the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, when present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the applicable electrical inspection authority or electrician.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to the telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of RENs of all the devices does not exceed five/Lindice dequivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaus qui peuvent etre
raccordes a une interface telephonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme dindices dequivalence de la sonnerie
de tous les dispositifs nexcede pas 5.
This equipment has been certified by the Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment C 22.2 No. 225.
REGULATORY
R-5
This equipment meets IC requirements CS03, PART II, PART III, PART VI.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus
as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada/Le present appareil numerique nemet
pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe A
prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par Industrie Canada.
5. BATTERY DISPOSAL
The UNIVERGE SV8500 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries, Chassis, and/or Blades, you must comply with applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal
procedures.
Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
MH250 (WLPS3(E)-A)
Lithium-ion
PSIII (PS3D)
Lithium-ion
CT-12 Headset Cordless
Nickel Metal-Hydride
DTH-4R-2
DTL-8R-1
Lithium
DTR-1R-2
Nickel-Cadmium
DTR-4R-2 TEL
Nickel-Cadmium
DTU-4R-1 TEL
Lead Acid
Lithium-ion
DTR-1HM-1 TEL
Headset Cordless II
Bluetooth Cordless Handset
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH! THE PRODUCT YOU PURCHASED CONTAINS LITHIUM, NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES. LITHIUM,
NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR DISPOSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER.
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries with the municipal solid waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact your local solid waste management officials for other information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling, and disposal of
the battery.
REGULATORY
R-6
Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state approved nickel-cadmium (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller
of automotive batteries. Contact your local waste management officials for other information regarding
the environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery contained in this product. For
Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERYSM when further information is required.
The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8500 system contains the following labels regarding proper disposal.
PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING
CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.

BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-Cd
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.

BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Pb
CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE

BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED
OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-MH
REGULATORY
R-7
REGULATORY NOTICE (For EU)

1. PREFACE
This manual is valid for the UNIVERGE SV8500 telephone system.
Some products described in this manual are not (yet) available for specific countries or markets. For this reason, the related specifications, instructions for installation and use of these specific products are not valid for
these markets. Refer to NEC Philips for more details in case of any questions about these products.
1.1
CE Notice (European Union)
The equipment described in this manual is intended to be connected to local area networks (LAN) and supports
a wide range of peripheral equipment. Additional interfaces are available for connection to public analogue
and digital telecommunication networks which comply with:
ETS 300 011 (PRI)
ETS 300 012 (BRI)
ETS 300 402 (PRI & BRI)
ETS 300 403 (PRI & BRI)
TBR3 :ISDN basic rate interface
TBR4 :ISDN primary rate interface
TBR21 :Analogue interface
To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country specific or network
specific features should match the supported features of the system. For an overview of the supported features,
refer to the detailed documentation that comes with this system, contact your local NEC Philips representative
or the support desk of NEC Philips Unified Solutions.
Hereby, NEC Philips Unified Solutions, declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
1.2
Electromagnetic compatibility
For some of the SV8500 communication platform components the following warning is applicable:
WARNIG :
This is a class A product.

In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
REGULATORY
R-8
Notice that this warning is only applicable to components of the SV8500 communication platform of which
the product type plate indicates Complies with EN55022 Class A.
2. PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION
2.1
For countries in the European Union

The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product in order to inform you that electrical and electronic products should not be disposed of as municipal waste.
Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories should be disposed of separately
in order to allow proper treatment, recovery and recycling. These products should be taken to a designated facility where the best available treatment, recovery and recycling techniques are available. Separate disposal
has significant advantages: valuable materials can be re-used and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted substances into the municipal waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human health and the environment.
Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical and electronic products via the
general municipal waste stream.
To facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements have been made for local
collection and recycling. If you need to dispose of your electrical and electronic products, please refer to your
supplier or the contractual agreements that your company made when these products were acquired.
At www.nec-philips.com/weee you can find information about separate disposal and environmentally sound
recycling.
2.2
For countries outside the European Union
Disposal of electrical and electronic products in countries outside the European Union should be done in line
with the local regulations. If no arrangement has been made with your supplier, please contact the local authorities for further information.
3. Declaration of Conformity
esky
NEC Philips Unified Solutions tmto prohlauje, e tento SV8500 je ve shod se zkladnmi
poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES.
http://www.nec-philips.com/doc
Dansk
Undertegnede NEC Philips Unified Solutions erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr SV8500 overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
REGULATORY
R-9
Hiermit erklrt NEC Philips Unified Solutions, dass sich das Gert SV8500 in bereinstimmung mit
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/
EG befindet.
Eesti
Kesolevaga kinnitab NEC Philips Unified Solutions seadme SV8500 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E
phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele.
English
Hereby, NEC Philips Unified Solutions, declares that this SV8500 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Espaol
Por medio de la presente NEC Philips Unified Solutions declara que el SV8500 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
NEC Philips S SS SV8500

1999/5/.
Franais
Par la prsente NEC Philips Unified Solutions dclare que l'appareil SV8500 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
slenska
Hr me lsir NEC Philips Unified Solutions yfir v a SV8500 er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og
arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano
Con la presente NEC Philips Unified Solutions dichiara che questo SV8500 conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski
REGULATORY
R-10
Ar o NEC Philips Unified Solutions deklar, ka SV8500 atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm
prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvi
iuo NEC Philips Unified Solutions deklaruoja, kad is SV8500 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti
Hawnhekk, NEC Philips Unified Solutions, jiddikjara li dan SV8500 jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Magyar
Alulrott, NEC Philips Unified Solutions nyilatkozom, hogy a SV8500 megfelel a vonatkoz
alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak.
Nederlands
Hierbij verklaart NEC Philips Unified Solutions dat het toestel SV8500 in overeenstemming is met
de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk
NEC Philips Unified Solutions erklrer herved at utstyret SV8500 er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski
Niniejszym, "NEC Philips Unified Solutions" deklaruje, ze SV8500 jest zgodny z wymaganiami i innymi warunkami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugus
NEC Philips Unified Solutions declara que este SV8500 est conforme com os requisitos essenciais
e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko
REGULATORY
R-11
NEC Philips Unified Solutions izjavlja, da je ta SV8500 v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky
NEC Philips Unified Solutions tmto vyhlasuje, e SV8500 spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi
NEC Philips Unified Solutions vakuuttaa tten ett SV8500 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY
oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska
Hrmed intygar NEC Philips Unified Solutions att denna SV8500 str I verensstmmelse med de
vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions

Anton Philipsweg 1
1223 KZ Hilversum
The Netherlands
REGULATORY
R-12
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

System Name
In this manual, the following are used unless the types of the Telephony Server and the PBX need to be identified.
TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL
SYSTEM NAMES
SV8500, the system
UNIVERGE SV8500
SV7000, the system
UNIVERGE SV7000 Note 1
MPS, SV7000 MPS, the system
UNIVERGE SV7000 MPS
IPX, 2400 IPX, NEAX 2400 IPX, the system
NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange Note 2
IPS, 2000 IPS, NEAX 2000 IPS
NEAX2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER Note 3
NEAX IMX, IMX
NEAX2400 IMX
NEAX7400 IMX
NEAX7400 ICS (IMX)
NEAX IVS2, IVS2
NEAX2000 IVS2
NEAX2000 INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER
NEAX7400 ICS M100MX
NEAX IVS, IVS
NEAX7400 ICS Model110

NEAX7400 ICS Model80VS
Note 1: UNIVERGE SV7000 Remote Node over IP is also included in the SV7000 series, which is migrated from
the existing IPX system. It is mentioned as Remote Node over IP or the system in this manual.
Note 2: In regard to China market, NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange has not been released but
NEAX2400 is released.
Note 3: In regard to China market, NEAX2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER has not been released but
NEAX2000 is released.
TERMS-1
Terminal Name
In this manual, the following terminals are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified.
TERMINAL NAMES
GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Dterm
Digital terminal
DT300 Series
IP Enabled
Dterm
IP terminal
Dterm Series E/Dterm 75

Dterm Series i
DT310
DT330
Dterm Series E/Dterm 75
with IP adapter Note 4
Dterm Series i with IP
adapter Note 4
DtermIP INASET Note 4

Desktop
Terminal
DtermIP
Soft Phone (Proprietary Protocol)
IP
Station
Soft Phone
DtermSP20
DtermSP30
Soft Phone (SIP)
SIP Multiple Line terminal
DtermSP30
(Proprietary Protocol)
DtermSP30 (SIP)
Soft Client SP350

DtermIP
SIP
terminal
DtermIP
(Proprietary Protocol)
DtermIP (SIP)
DT710
DT700 Series
DT730
DT750
WLAN Handset (MH Series)
MH250
Standard SIP terminal
Third-party SIP terminal

PHS
PS
PCS
Note 4: This terminal provides users with all features currently available on DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol).
TERMS-2
Media Gateway (MG), Media Converter (MC), and Voice Conference Server (VS) Names
In this manual, the following are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified.
GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL
EQUIPMENT NAMES
MG(PRI) Card [SCA-24PRIA]

MG(PRI) Box [MG-24PRIA]
MG(PRI)
MG(PRI) Card [SCA-30PRIA]

MG(PRI) Box [MG-30PRIA]
MG-PRI/MG-PRA
MG-T1(SIP)
MG-T1(SIP) Card [SCA-24DTIA]

MG(BRI) Card [SCA-2BRIA]
MG(BRI)
MG(BRI) Box [MG-2BRIA]

MG-BRI
MG-SIP16
MG(SIP)
MG-SIP16 Card [SCA-16SIPMGA]

MG-SIP16 Box [MG-16SIPMGA]
MCMG Card [SCA-4LC2COTA]
MC&MG-COT
MCMG Box [MG-4LC2COTA]

MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA]
MC&MG-COT with PFT
MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA]
MG-COT
MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB]

MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTC]
Analog 2MC
Analog MC
8LC Card [SCA-8LCA]

8LC Card [SCA-8LCA-EMEA]
VS-32
VS32
VS-32(Dual) Card [SCA-VS32VA]

VS-32(Dual) Box [MG-VS32VA]
TERMS-3
General Terms
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) on this manual is a term equivalent to Calling Line Identification
(CLI) in Australia.
TERMS-4
NWA-041677-001 (E)
ISSUE 1.0
JULY, 2008
UNIVERGE SV8500
Installation Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Work Flow of SV8500 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. How to Follow This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Essential/Critical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. How to Use Service Grounding Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. General Knowledge of SV8500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 About Release Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Structure of Telephony Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 TP and SP for System Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Lan Interface Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 LAN1 Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 LAN2 Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INT-1
INT-1
INT-4
INT-5
INT-6
INT-8
INT-8
INT-9
INT-9
INT-9
INT-10
INT-12
INT-12
INT-14
INT-16
CHAPTER 1 WHAT IS SV8500? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Management by 4-LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Usage of LAN Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 NIC Setting of LAN Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Data Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Switches, Lamps and Connectors on Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 EMA Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 IOC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Switches, Lamps and Connectors on Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 EMA SUB-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 EMA SUB-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 EXB Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. SV8500 with PIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 AC-Powered Model (Component Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
1
1
2
3
3
4
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
16
17
18
20
20
21
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page
4.1.3 Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.4 Circuit Card Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 DC-Powered Model (Built-up Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 Circuit Card Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
24
25
25
26
31
33
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Equipment Room Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Floor Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Floor Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Floor Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Wall, Ceiling, and Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Lighting Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Main Source Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Air Conditioning Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Temperature And Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Switching Equipment Heat Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Preparation of Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Preparing the Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Preparing the Module Group Face Layout and the Port Accommodation Diagram . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Preparing the Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. INSTALLATION CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 AC Input, DC Power, and Ground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Cables between Telephony Server and MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. MDF Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. INSTALLATION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
41
42
44
46
47
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION - SV8500 SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Site Surveying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Equipment Location Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Floor Layout Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Power and Ground Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Installing Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Installing 19-Inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 19-Inch Rack Installing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Installing SV8500 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Assembling SV8500 Server Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Inserting CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
49
49
49
49
50
51
51
52
57
57
58
58
ii

Page
4.2.2 Assembling Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 Inserting EMA, EMA SUB, EXB, and IOC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 External Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Securing SV8500 Server Module on 19-Inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Securing BASEU on 19-Inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Securing SV8500 Server on 19-Inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Source Power Cable and Ground Cable Connection on BASEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Power and Grounding Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Telephony Server Rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Rectifier Battery, AC Power Distribution Board, and Earth Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 Telephony Server MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Power and Grounding Cables Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Cable Connection to SV8500 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Power Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 LAN Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
59
63
74
74
76
77
79
79
80
80
81
82
83
83
88
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION - PIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Equipment Location Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Components and Accessories of AC-Powered Model (Component Type: 1-IMG) . . . . . .
1.2.2 Components and Accessories of DC-Powered Model (Built-up Type: 1-IMG) . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3 Components and Accessories of DC-Powered Model (Built-up Type: 4-IMG) . . . . . . . . .
2. Mounting MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 MDF Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 MDF Mounting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Cable Termination on MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 MDF Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 MDF Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Cable Connection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Test Spring Terminal and Arrester on MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Purpose of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Connecting Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Outline View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Circuit Diagram of Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.5 Connecting Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Securing Modules on 19-Inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 AC-Powered Model of PIR (Component Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Securing PIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Mounting Circuit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 DC-Powered Model of PIR (Built-up Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Securing PIR and TSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Mounting Circuit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Backboard on PIR and TSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
89
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
95
98
98
98
99
105
105
105
106
106
107
108
108
108
113
115
115
123
125
125
iii

Page
4.2 Installation Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Internal and Inter-Frame Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Power Cable Connection (common to all the models of PIRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Power Cable and Bus Cable Connection for AC-Powered Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 Power Cable and Bus Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model (1-IMG) . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Power Cable and Bus Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model (4-IMG) . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 How to Fix Connectors on PIR for Connecting BUS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.6 PLO Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.7 MUSIC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Mounting Second Power Unit on AC-DC Power Unit for Dual Power Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
132
132
133
142
148
163
168
170
172
172
173
CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Preparing License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Download License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Import SVI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Upload License Data to SV8500 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Activate Uploaded License Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 Work after License Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Initial Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Program Install to CF Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Program Install for Single Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Program Install for Dual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Power-ON Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Power ON/OFF Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Power ON/OFF Procedure for Telephony Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 SV8500 Server Power ON/OFF Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 PIR Power ON/OFF Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 TSWR Power ON/OFF Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Initial Data Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Initial Data Assignment for Using IP Terminal and SIP Multiple Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Initial Data Assignment for Using WLAN Handset (MH Series) and Standard SIP Terminal . . .
6. System Configuration Data Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 System Time - ANTPL/ATIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 System Data - ASYD, ASYDL (LDM), and ASYDN (NDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Unit Data - AUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Program Version Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Install Version Upgrade Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Program Version Upgrade for Single Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Program Version Upgrade for Dual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Turn Back to Former Version of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
175
175
175
175
176
176
177
177
178
178
178
178
180
183
185
185
187
188
189
190
190
192
196
196
196
199
200
200
200
200
202
204
iv

Page
7.3.1
7.3.2
Turn Back to Former Version of Program in Single Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Turn Back to Former Version of Program in Dual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. System Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 System Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Circuit Card Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Basic Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Dial Tone Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Station-to-Station Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. System Changeover Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Speech Path Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Port Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 ORT (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Line (LC, ELC Cards) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Cards) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Cards) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 SND (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 Three-Party Conference Trunk Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 Connection Test-Digital Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Access Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Transfer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12 Connection Test-Radio Paging Trunk (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.13 Howler and Ringing Signal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Overall Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Overall Test for CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Overall Test for CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Connection and Alternate Routing Test to Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Tandem Connection Test to Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 PAD Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. IPPAD Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
208
209
209
211
212
212
213
214
215
216
216
218
219
220
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
232
234
235
237
238
240
242
244
CHAPTER 7 FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Connection Error on IP Terminals/SIP Multiple Line Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 IP Terminals Connection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 SIP Multiple Line Terminals Connection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Irregular Lamp Indications on Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Dial Tone Connection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Station-to-Station Connection Error on Digital Terminals/Analog TELs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
248
248
249
250
252
253
CHAPTER 8 WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Manage Office Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Office Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Test Result Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Attach Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX
SYSTEM DATA INSTALLED IN INITIAL STARTUP
vi
255
255
255
256
256
260
APP-1
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
1. Work Flow of SV8500 Installation
Installing SV8500 Server
START
1.
Before starting installation, take measures against static electric- How to Use Service Grounding Kit
ity.
2.
Install main source power equipment for supplying power to Te- Installing Power Equipment
lephony Server.
3.
Site Surveying
Check the condition of setting location.
4.
Carry in, unpack, and check the components of SV8500 server. Unpacking
5.
Build up 19-inch rack on the floor to mount SV8500 server.
Installing 19-Inch Rack
6.
Assembling SV8500 Server Module
Assemble units and modules of SV8500 server.
7.
Secure units and modules of SV8500 server on 19-inch rack.
Securing SV8500 Server Module on 19-Inch Rack
8.
Source Power Cable and Ground Cable Connection
Wire source power and ground cables.
on BASEU
9.
Connect power, Ether and IOC cables to SV8500 server.
END
INT-1
Cable Connection to SV8500 Server
INTRODUCTION
Installing PIR
START
1.
Before starting PIR installation, inspect the condition of setting

location, unpack and check the components.
Preparation
2.
Attach MDF panel, terminate cables, and test the connection of

MDF.
Mounting MDF
3.
Secure PIR on 19-inch rack and insert circuit card.
Securing Modules on 19-Inch Rack
4.
Connect installation cable between LT connector and MDF.
Installation Cable Connection
5.
Internal and Inter-Frame Cable Connection
Connect internal and inter-frame cables to PIR.
END
INT-2
INTRODUCTION
System Startup
START
1.
Prepare PCPro Tools and PCPro for maintenance console.
See PCPro Setup Manual.
2.
Initial Startup
Install SV8500 system program to CF card.
3.
Initial Startup
Set the switches and power on.
4.
Initial Startup
Acquire activation code.
5.
Installation Test
Perform installation test.
END
INT-3
INTRODUCTION
2. How to Follow This Manual

This manual explains how to proceed with SV8500 installation. The following chapters sequentially outline the
work to be performed:
Chapter 1: WHAT IS SV8500?

This chapter explains the specifications of the system; face layout and components are shown.
Chapter 2: INSTALLATION DESIGN

This chapter explains the installation design and preparation of setting floor and required installation materials.
Chapter 3: INSTALLATION - SV8500 SERVER

This chapter explains the procedures pertaining to the equipment carry-in, the installation of rack, SV8500
server modules, and the system power supply (cabling, wiring, etc.).
Chapter 4: INSTALLATION - PIR

This chapter explains the procedures for installing PIR modules, Main Distribution Frame (MDF), and internal/inter-frame cabling between modules.
Chapter 5: SYSTEM STARTUP

This chapter explains the procedures for the initial power-on and assigning office data after the system installation.
Chapter 6: INSTALLATION TEST

This chapter explains the test procedures to be performed, after the system startup, to determine:
if the system operates as directed by the office data
whether a reinitialization or a system changeover can be performed
whether the interface with the associated distant office is normal.
Chapter 7: FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

This chapter explains the recovery procedure to be followed if a fault occurs during the system startup or
basic connection activities.
Chapter 8: WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TEST

This chapter explains the tasks to be performed after the installation tests, pursuant to a normal system cutover.
Appendix: SYSTEM DATA INSTALLED IN INITIAL STARTUP

This appendix lists the system data installed in initial startup.
INT-4
INTRODUCTION
3. Essential/Critical Information
In order to prevent accidents or equipment damage when performing tasks, this manual provides WARNING,
CAUTION and Note indicators to draw attention to specific matters.
1.
Note:
2.
Meaning
WARNING:
If warnings are not heeded, personal injury may result.
CAUTION:
If cautions are not heeded, actions may result in damage to the equipment and/or the
system.
Indicates an item that requires special attention.

Locations of Indicators
WARNING and CAUTION indicators are generally located at the top of each page. Notes are included as
part of the task procedures on a page.

This manual provides Static Caution indicators for the sections which describe tasks that involve static-sensitive
components.
Static Caution Indicator
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
INT-5
INTRODUCTION
4. How to Use Service Grounding Kit

Be sure to use a Portable Field Service Grounding Kit to prevent damage to static-sensitive components. The
3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit is recommended as an effective countermeasure against static electricity.
3M Model 8012, that consists of:
2 2 VELOSTAT work mat
15 ft. (4.6 m) ground cord
CHARGE-GUARD wrist strap with alligator clip

Before handling circuit cards, spread out the work mat and then connect the ground cord to the frame or to another ground source.
If using a CHARGE-GUARD wrist strap, then connect the wrist strap to the frame or to another ground using
the cord that is included in the kit.
See the following figures for the way to use the service kit.
Take notes the precautions below before handling circuit card and CF card:
Do not touch the surface, the mounted components, and gold-coated connectors of circuit card with
bare hands.
Band the wrist strap on the wrist before handling circuit card and CF card.
Countermeasures against static electricity is necessary when inserting/ejecting CF card with the system
powered on.
How to Use Service Kit (when handing circuit card)
<How to handle circuit card>
Connector
Set MB key
to UP.
installer
432-P
S
Card puller tab
)
U
P
U
P
Backboard
contact portion
Connect ground wire to

the frame. Note 1
wrist strap
U
P
U
P
wrist strap
PWR ACT ALM
EMA
APEX
LOAD
LAN1 LAN2
TxRx
LOAD
LAN1 LAN2
TxRx
LINK TxRx
SV7000 TP/S
LINK
PWR ACT ALM

APEX
LINK TxRx
SP-234
SN1234
conductive sheet
INT-6
LINK
SV7000 SP/S
Place the circuit card on

a conductive sheet.
INTRODUCTION
How to Use Service Kit (when handing CF card)
PW
R
LOA
D
ON
LIN
E
CO
NS
OLE
CF
LINE
SPE
1
2
ON
LINE
SPE
ED
2
US
B
wrist strap
ED
1
3
MO
DE
PW
R
3
SPE
ED
SYS
LINE
EXPR
CO
NS
OLE
SYS
ALM
SYS
LINE
PW
R
LOA
D
ON
LIN
E
LIN
1
OP
E
SPE
ED
ESS
CF
1
3
PFT
PF
SYS
LOC SYS
K
SEL
SE
2
SWO
0
SWO
1
LINE
1
2
ON
ALM
MB
(SU
B)
GEA
SPE
ED
INIT
PBI
No.
LINE
SPE
ED
MO
DE
2
US
B
EM
AM
AIN
LINE
SPE
ED
LINE
EXPR
SPE
ED
ESS
GEA
CF card
Connect ground wire to
the frame. Note 1
Note 1: A ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by insulating material.
INT-7
INTRODUCTION
5. General Knowledge of SV8500

5.1 About Release Information
The table below shows the relationship between IPX/SV7000 and SV8500 for the release information.
IPX/SV7000
SV8500
R25
S1
R26
S2
R27
S3
INT-8
INTRODUCTION
5.2 Structure of Telephony Server
5.2.1
General
This section explains the structure of Telephony Server, mainly about processors it has. Telephony Server has
TP and SP as processors on its CPU. Both TP and SP work together to provide various features. The following
are general description of TP and SP.
Note:
TP: Telephony Processor, supports all the features provided in the system.
SP: Signaling Processor, works as SIP server that handles call control signals using Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP). SP consists of two parts - one for SIP terminals using a particular feature called
SIP TERMINAL ACCOMMODATION [S-146] (hereinafter called SP (for SIP terminal)), and
the other for other devices/stations using SP (hereinafter called SP (MPH)).
Each of IP devices/stations communicates with either of them (TP/SP) as registration destination. For information about it, refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations.
5.2.2
TP and SP for System Changeover
In dual configuration, each processor may stay in active (ACT) or stand-by (STBY) state. ACT-side processors
handle each operation while STBY-side processors prepare for system changeover. Their states change when
system changeover is performed. The relationship between system changeover and the state of each processor
(TP/SP) is described below.
TP: changes its state (ACT/STBY) according to the state of the system to which the TP belongs.
SP: operates differently between two parts of SP.
SP (for SIP terminal) Note 1: operates simultaneously with ACT-side TP.

SP (MPH): is always in ACT (changeover is not executed).
System #1 (STBY)
ACT
System #1 (ACT)
TP
TP
STBY
SP
(for SIP Terminal)
Note 1
SP
(MPH)
System
Changeover
System #0 (ACT)
SP
(for SIP Terminal)
Note 1
SP
(MPH)
System #0 (STBY)
TP
TP
SP
(for SIP Terminal)
Note 1
SP
(for SIP Terminal)
Note 1
SP
(MPH)
SP
(MPH)
Note 1: SIP terminal here refers to ones using SIP TERMINAL ACCOMMODATION [S-146] feature. For infor-
mation about this feature, refer to the Data Programming Manual - Business.
INT-9
INTRODUCTION
5.3 Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations
Here lists IP addresses of Telephony Server to be assigned to each IP device/station as its registration destination. The IP address varies depending on several conditions, consisting of PH kind that handles the device/station, protocol mode in which the device/terminal operates, and Telephony Servers configuration. The table
below specifies the IP address necessary for each IP device/station, covering all the conditions.
Category
CPU
Note 1
Protocol
mode
Device/Station
IP Address of
Registration Destination
Single
Configuration
Dual
Configuration
Internal PHE
Analog 2MC
Proprietary
MC&MG-COT (MC part)
Protocol mode IP-BS
VS32
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1 (ACT)
Internal PHI
MC&MG-COT (MG part)

MG-COT
Proprietary
MG(BRI)
Protocol mode
MG(PRI) Note 2
MG(SIP)
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1 (ACT)
Proprietary
IP terminal
Protocol mode
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1 (ACT)
/(System #0)
/(System #1)
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1 (ACT)
SIP mode
MG-COT
MG(BRI)
MG(PRI)
MG-T1(SIP)
8LC Card
VS32
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1
(System #0)
/(System #1)
SIP mode
WLAN Handset (MH Series)

Standard SIP Terminal
LAN1 (ACT)
LAN1 (ACT)
PH
TP
SPPHD
SIP mode
SIP terminal Note 3
Proprietary
MC&MG-COT (MG part)
Protocol mode MG(BRI)
MPH
SP
SPPHI
Note:
Device/terminal names in the table are general terms. If you want to know formal names of them, refer to
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL at the top of this manual.
Note:
In this manual, Telephony Server may be referred as DRS or SIP server depending on the registration
destination. IP address of DRS/SIP server is, however, same as that of Telephony Server. Therefore, IP address of DRS/SIP server is also as the table above.
Note 1: Telephony Server has two parts of processors on its CPU, TP and SP. For the information about it, refer
to Structure of Telephony Server.
INT-10
INTRODUCTION
Note 2: MG(PRI) in Proprietary Protocol mode uses LAN1 as the registration destination while uses LAN2 as the
signaling control port. LAN interface for the signaling control port, however, can be changed to LAN1 by
ADTM command.
Note 3: SIP terminal excludes WLAN Handset (MH Series) here.
INT-11
INTRODUCTION
5.4 Lan Interface Accommodation
There are four LAN ports on the front panel of Telephony Server, of which LAN1 and LAN2 play a central role
in managing the whole system. This section explains usage of them (LAN1/LAN2). Additional information
about the LAN ports is described in Management by 4-LAN Port of the Installation Manual.
5.4.1
LAN1 Accommodation
LAN1 mainly accommodates the devices/terminals for call controlling. They do not need to keep links with Telephony Server when system changeover is performed in dual configuration system. In each case where the system is in single configuration or dual configuration, IP address (ACT) is basically assigned to the devices/
terminals as Telephony Server address.
Note:
When the system is in dual configuration, IP address (System #0/#1) is used instead of IP address (ACT)
in the following cases.
Telephony Server address as FTP server
Telephony Server address as registration destination for IP devices accommodated in SP-PHI and using SIP mode. (See Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations)
PWR
SYS
ALM
LINK
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB) PFT
SPEED
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
SPEED LINE
SPEED
PBI No.
INIT
SWO0
SPEED LINE
LINE
SYS SYS
LOCK SEL
SYS 1
SYS 0
LINE
SWO1
EMA MAIN
PWR
2
ACT
ALM
PWR
LINE
ACT
ALM
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
LAN2
Call Control
IP Terminal
PSTN
SIP Terminal
FCCS
over IP
INT-12
INTRODUCTION
Each communication using LAN1 as its interface is listed in the table below, where relationships between each
application and socket are shown.
Application
Protocol
Port No.
IP Address
Registration by Proprietary Protocol
UDP
3456 ACT
Registration by SIP
UDP
5060 ACT/System #0/System #1
Internal PHI Note 1
UDP
64000
NMS
TCP
60060
Receiving Health Check from SR-MGC (Server)
UDP
60110
Sending Health Check to SR-MGC (Client)
UDP
60120
SR-MGC Charge MGC Side
TCP
60140
SR-MGC Charge SR-MGC Side
TCP
60150
Internal PHE
UDP
60130
Internal PHF
UDP
60180
FTP
TCP
20/21
SSH
TCP
22
Telnet
TCP
23
HTTP
TCP
80
ACT
System #0/System #1
Note 1: Internal PHI may use LAN2 for communication with MG(PRI), which depends on your setting.
INT-13
INTRODUCTION
5.4.2
LAN2 Accommodation
LAN2 mainly accommodates the devices for operation/administration. They need to keep links with Telephony
Server when system changeover is performed in dual configuration system. In each case where the system is in
single configuration or dual configuration, IP address (ACT) is basically assigned to the devices as Telephony
Server address.
PWR
SYS
ALM
LINK
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB) PFT
SPEED
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
SPEED LINE
SPEED
PBI No.
INIT
SWO0
SPEED LINE
LINE
SYS SYS
LOCK SEL
SYS 1
SYS 0
LINE
SWO1
EMA MAIN
PWR
ACT
ALM
PWR
ACT
2
LINE
ALM
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
LAN2
Operation
/Administration
Maintenance
Console
CCIS
over IP
Server
LAN1 LAN2
PWR ACT ALM
LOAD
TxRx
LINK TxRx
LINK
Each communication using LAN2 as its interface is listed in the table below, where relationships between each
application and socket are shown.
INT-14
INTRODUCTION
Application
Protocol
Port No.
PCPro
TCP
60000
CCIS Cluster
TCP
60001
SMDR
TCP
60010
MCI
TCP
60020
OAI
TCP
60030
MIS
TCP
60040
PMS
TCP
60050
CS Report
TCP
60080
MCC
TCP
60190
FCCS Cluster
TCP
60210
DEBUG
UDP
40000
SNMP
UDP
161/162
SMTP (Client)
TCP
1024-65535
DNS
UDP
53
SNTP
UDP
123
Internal PHI (for MG(PRI))
TCP
64000
Internal PHC (Server)
TCP
57000
Internal PHC (Client)
TCP
65030
INT-15
IP Address
ACT
INTRODUCTION
5.5 Trunking Diagram
The figure below shows the trunking diagram of SV8500 for overviewing the network configuration.
Note 1
Telephony Server
NCU
MDF
Analog TEL
Digital terminal
ISDN terminal
Analog PSTN
LC
ORT
ELC
IRT
ILC
SND
BWT
COT
DOD
COT
DIT
CFT
COT
DID
DID
EMT
ODT
Tie line
LDT
DTI
MUX/TSW
DTI
CCH
CCIS
MODEM
ISDN (PRI)
CCH
DTI
DCH
ISDN (PRI)
PRT
ISDN (BRI)
BRT
ATT/Desk Console
ATI
Printer
PCPro
IOC
SIP terminal
AP
IP-BS
SV8500 Server
Note 2
PS
IP terminal
GW
Router
IP network
Note 1: In this manual, the range blocked in dotted red is called Telephony Server.
Note 2: In this manual, the range blocked in dotted blue is called SV8500 server.
INT-16
INTRODUCTION
This table identifies the function name of each line/trunk interface and switching controller.
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
ATI
Attendant Console Interface
BRT
Basic Rate Interface Trunk
BWT
Bothway Trunk
CCH
Common Channel Handler
CFT
Conference Trunk
COT
Central Office Trunk
DCH
D-Channel Handler
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
DIT
Direct-In Termination
DLC
Digital Line Circuit
DOD
Direct Outward Dialing
DTI
Digital Interface
ELC
Electronic Line Circuit
EMT
E & M Trunk
IOC
Input/Output Controller
IRT
Incoming Register Trunk
LC
Line Circuit
LDT
Loop Dialing Trunk
LTST
Line Test
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
MUX
Multiplexer
NCU
Night Connection Unit
ODT
Outband Dialing Trunk
ORT
Outgoing Register Trunk
PRT
Primary Rate Interface Trunk
SND
Sender
TLT
Tie Line Trunk
TSW
Time Division Switch
INT-17
INTRODUCTION
This page is for your notes.
INT-18
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
WHAT IS SV8500?
1. General
SV8500 is a telephony server system compatible with next-generation network to provide advanced services
supporting both pure IP and full TDM-based connection.
SV8500 Server Overview
PWR
SYS
ALM
LINK
ACT
ALM
MB
(SUB) PFT
SYS 1
SYS 0
LINE
SPEED LINE
SYS SYS
LOCK SEL
PBI No.
1
ON
1
SWO0
INIT
SWO1
SPEED
PWR
LOAD
ON
LINE
PWR
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LOAD
4
ON
LINE
LINE
Combining peripheral equipment, SV8500 can handle various types of configuration. For details, refer to Peripheral Equipment Description.
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
2. Management by 4-LAN Port

This section explains four of LAN ports (LAN1-LAN4) located on the front panel of Telephony Server. Telephony Server employs these LAN ports to manage the whole system. LAN1 and LAN2 provide separate management between user network connection and operation/administration. It means that the system can protect
user network by having separated networks for each.
LAN1 mainly communicates with the devices/terminals for call controlling. They do not need to keep links with
Telephony Server when system changeover is performed in dual configuration system.
LAN2 mainly communicates with the devices for operation/administration. They need to keep links with Telephony Server when system changeover is performed in dual configuration system.
LAN3 and LAN4 provide FCCS network.
PWR
SYS
ALM
LINK
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB) PFT
SPEED
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
SPEED LINE
SPEED
PBI No.
INIT
SWO0
SPEED LINE
LINE
SYS SYS
LOCK SEL
SYS 1
SYS 0
LINE
SWO1
EMA MAIN
PWR
2
ACT
ALM
PWR
LINE
ACT
ALM
FCCS-A
FCCS-B
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
LAN2
Operation
/Administration
Call Control
IP Station
PSTN
SIP Station
Maintenance
Console
FCCS
over IP
Server
LAN1 LAN2
PWR ACT ALM
LOAD
TxRx
LINK TxRx
LINK
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
2.1 Usage of LAN Ports
The following shows the usage of each LAN port.

LAN Port
Maximum
Transmission
Speed
LAN1
1 Gbps
LAN2
1 Gbps
LAN3
100 Mbps
LAN4
100 Mbps
Features
Communication with terminals for call controlling including IP station, IPBS, VS-32, MGs/Establishment of FCCS over IP
Communication with devices for operation/administration including PCPro,
OAI, SMDR, MIS, PMS, MCI, SNMP/Establishment of CCIS over IP
Establishment of FCCS network (FCCS-A)
Establishment of FCCS network (FCCS-B)
2.2 NIC Setting of LAN Ports
NIC of each LAN port can be set in the following options.
Note:
LAN Port
Transmission Speed
Duplex Mode
LAN1
Auto negotiation/10 Mbps/100 Mbps/1 Gbps
Half-duplex/Full-duplex
LAN2
Auto negotiation/10 Mbps/100 Mbps/1 Gbps
Half-duplex/Full-duplex
LAN3
Auto negotiation (fixed, cannot be changed)
LAN4
Auto negotiation (fixed, cannot be changed)
- NIC settings must correspond to each other between LAN port and connected device.
- Default setting of LAN1/LAN2 is auto negotiation.
- Selecting 1Gbps makes full duplex fixed.
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
2.3 IP Address
This section explains IP addresses of LAN ports. IP addresses required to be assigned depend on your configuration as follow.
When Telephony Server is in Single Configuration

IP addresses (ACT) of LAN1 and LAN2 need to be assigned.
LAN Port
Kind of IP Address to be Assigned
Default IP Address
LAN1
IP address (ACT)
- (Not available)
LAN2
IP address (ACT)
172.16.253.0/16
IP Address (ACT)
: 192.168.1.1
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
LAN2
IP Address (ACT)
: 172.16.253.0
IP Station
(Call Control)
Note:
Maintenance Console
(Operation/Administration)
- Initialize the system by SINZ command (TYPE: System Initialize) after modifying IP address of LAN1.
In the case of LAN2, it is not necessary.

- LAN1 and LAN2 can have either same or different subnet masks.
- IP addresses of LAN1 and LAN2 must be different.
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
When Telephony Server is in Dual Configuration

Telephony Server in dual configuration has six IP addresses to be assigned. Each LAN has three IP addresses consisting of System #0, System #1 and ACT. IP address to be used in communication is usually ACT
though IP addresses (System #0/System #1) are partly used, including SNMP.
LAN Port
LAN1
LAN2
Kind of IP Address to be
Assigned
Default IP Address
IP address (ACT)
- (Not available)
IP address (System #0)
- (Not available)
- (Not available)
IP address (ACT side)
172.16.253.0/16
172.16.253.2/16
172.16.253.1/16
IP Address (System #1)

: 192.168.1.2
IP Station
(Call Control)
IP address of active side

Static IP address independent of ACT/STBY
IP address of active side
Static IP address independent of ACT/STBY
System #1
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
LAN2
IP Address (ACT): 192.168.1.100

: 172.16.253.1
IP Address (ACT): 172.16.253.100
LAN3
LAN1

LAN4
: 192.168.1.1
LAN2
System #0
Note:
REMARKS
Maintenance Conso
(Operation/Administra
: 172.16.253.0
- Initialize the system by SINZ command (TYPE: System Initialize) after modifying IP address of LAN1.
In the case of LAN2, it is not necessary.

- LAN1 and LAN2 can have either the same or different subnet masks.
- All IP addresses of each LAN (ACT/System #0/System #1) must have the same subnet masks.
- IP addresses of LAN1 and LAN2 must be different.
- When IP address (ACT) of LAN2 is assigned 0.0.0.0, default values are allocated to IP addresses
(System #0/System #1) at active side.
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
2.4 Routing Setting
The routing tables of LAN1 and LAN2 are independent of each other. So each of them needs routing data respectively.
Note:
- Use ADTM command to assign routing data (Default Gateway, static route) to each of LAN1 and LAN2.
- A maximum of four destinations can be assigned as static routing information to each of LAN1 and
LAN2.
When LAN1 and LAN2 are in the same subnet:

Default Gateway information is assigned to each as an example below.
IP Address: 192.168.1.1
<LAN1 Routing Info>
Default Gateway
: 192.168.1.254
LAN3
LAN1
IP Address: 192.168.1.3
LAN4
LAN2
<LAN2 Routing Info>

Default Gateway
: 192.168.1.254
Router: 192.168.1.254
Static Route information is assigned to each as an example below.

IP Address: 192.168.1.1
<LAN1 Routing Info>
Destination IP Address
: 172.16.0.0
Router IP Address
: 192.168.1.253
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
LAN2
Router: 192.168.1.254
IP Address: 192.168.1.3
<LAN2 Routing Info>
: 172.16.0.0
Router IP Address
: 192.168.1.253
Router: 192.168.1.253
Router: 172.16.253.253
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
When LAN1 and LAN2 are in different subnet:

Default Gateway information is assigned to each as an example below.
IP Address: 192.168.1.1
<LAN1 Routing Info>
Default Gateway
: 192.168.1.254
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
IP Address: 172.16.253.0
<LAN2 Routing Info>
Default Gateway
: 172.16.253.254
LAN2
Router: 192.168.1.254
Router: 172.16.253.254
Static Route information is assigned to each as an example below.

IP Address: 192.168.1.1
<LAN1 Routing Info>
: 10.41.0.0
Router IP Address
: 192.168.1.253
Router: 192.168.1.254
LAN3
LAN1
LAN4
LAN2
IP Address: 172.16.253.0
<LAN2 Routing Info>
: 10.40.0.0
Router IP Address
: 172.16.253.253
Router: 172.16.253.254
Router: 172.16.253.253
Router: 192.168.1.253
Router: 10.40.0.254
Router: 10.41.0.253
2.5 Data Programming
Refer to ADTM command in Command Manual for the data assignment of LAN1 and LAN2. LAN3 and LAN4
are not available to change the setting.
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
3. Specifications
3.1 Dimensions and Weights
Total weights
16 kg (564.4 oz)
AC 100V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 120V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 230V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 240V (50/60 Hz) 10%
Input power source
DC -48V 10%
AC 100V: 3.5A
Maximum power consumption
DC -48V: 6.5A
Outside dimension
19-inch rack mount, 3U-box (*see the figure Dimensions)
Dimensions
PW
R
LO
AD
ON
LINE
132.0
(5.20)
LIN
E
SPE
ED
LIN
PW
R
E
SPE
ED
PW
R
LO
AD
SYS
ALM
LIN
SYS
SYS
LIN
OP
E
ALM
SPE
ON
LINE
ED
LIN
MB
(SU
B)
E
SPE
ED
PFT
SYS
LOCK
SYS
SEL
SW
O0
1
SW
O1
LIN
INIT
PBI
No.
E
SPE
ED
LIN
E
SPE
ED
2
3
LIN
E
SPE
ED
LIN
E
SPE
ED
33.0 (1.30")
476.0
(1' 6.74")
430.0
(1 4.93)
Unit: mm (inch)
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
3.2 Switches, Lamps and Connectors on Front Panel
Switches, lamps, and connectors on the front panel of each card in SV8500 server are explained in this section.
For the details on the switches, see Section 2. Initial Startup in Chapter 5.
[ CPU card slot]
[ CPU card #1 ]
PW
R
LOAD
ON
LINE
[ EMA card slot ]
CF
CO
NS
OLE
LIN
[ CPU card #0 ]
1
2
3
ON
E
SPEE
D LIN
E
SPEE
MOD
2
US
LIN
PW
R
SYS
ALM
E
SPEE
PW
R
LOAD
D LIN
E
SPEE
LINK
SYS
SYS
OP
E
ALM
MB
(SUB
ON
LINE
) PF
T
CF
CO
NS
OLE
SYS
LOCK
SYS
SEL
SW
O0
1
LIN
1
2
3
ON
SW
O1
E
SPEE
D LIN
INIT
PBI
No.
E
SPEE
MOD
2
US
LIN
3
E
SPEE
D LIN
E
SPEE
[ IOC card #0 ]
[ IOC card #1 ]
AD
ON E
LIN
LO
R
PW
AD
ON E
LIN
LO
R
PW
[ IOC card slot ]
Note:
A maximum of two IOC cards can be inserted per system; one IOC card to IOC #0 slot and IOC #1 slot
respectively.
3.2.1
CPU Card
LEDs
PWR lamp
LOAD lamp
ON LINE lamp
LINK
SPEED LINK
SPEED
CF
PWR
1 2 3 4
ON
LOAD
ON
LINE
CONSOLE
MODE
USB
LINK
SPEED LINK
SPEED
PWR switch
CONSOLE connector
CF slot
LAN connectors
USB2.0 connector
MODE switch
NAME
PWR switch
PWR lamp
LOAD lamp
COLOR/
SW Number
Green
DESCRIPTION
Press to turn on SV8500 server.
Press and hold for four seconds to turn off SV8500 server.
Lights when CPU card is powered ON.
OFF
CPU card is powered OFF.
Red
Lights when accessing CF card.
OFF
No access to CF card.
Lights when CPU card is operating normally.
ON LINE lamp
Green
Flashes fast when CPU card has no data.

Flashes slowly when SP has not started up.
OFF
Telephony Server has not started up yet.
MODE switch
CPU MBR key

Used for FTP/telnet/web server manual setup.
CONSOLE connector
Not used.
CF slot
For accommodating a CF card.

Operating program and office data is written on the CF card.
10
REMARKS
CHAPTER 1
COLOR/
SW Number
NAME
Flashes when accessing IP network.
OFF
LAN1
LAN1 SPEED
Port link is not established.
Green
100 Mbps
Orange
1 Gbps
External LAN interface
for TCP/IP
Lights when port link is established.
(max 1 Gbps).
OFF
OFF
LAN2
LAN2 SPEED
Green
100 Mbps
Orange
1 Gbps
OFF
LAN3
Green
100 Mbps
OFF
10 Mbps
LAN4
Internal LAN interface

for FCCS
(max 100 Mbps).
OFF
LAN4 SPEED
Green
100 Mbps
OFF
10 Mbps
Not used.
USB2.0 connector
Used for FCCS (side

A) controlling.
Green
LAN4 LINK
3.2.2
OFF
LAN3 SPEED
EMA Card
LINK lamp
ACT lamp
ALM lamp
INIT switch
PBI No. switch
PWR
SYS
ALM
LINK
ACT
ALM
MB
(SUB) PFT
SYS SYS
LOCK SEL
PBI No.
INIT
SYS 1
SYS 0
Used for the communication with operation/

administration devices, such as PCPro and
SNMP.
10 Mbps
Green
LAN3 LINK
Used for the communication with call controlling devices, such

as IP terminals and
MG equipment.
10 Mbps
Green
LAN2 LINK
REMARKS
Green
LAN1 LINK
DESCRIPTION
WHAT IS SV8500?
SWO0
SWO1
SW01 switch
SW00 switch
SYS ALM lamp
PWR lamp
11
Used for FCCS (side

B) controlling.
CHAPTER 1
COLOR/
SW Number
NAME
PWR lamp
SYS ALM lamp
SYS0
LINK lamp
SYS1
SYS0
ACT lamp
SYS1
SYS0
Green
Lights when EMA card is powered ON.
OFF
EMA card is powered OFF.
SYS1
SW01 switch
MN (minor) alarm: One of the system cooling

fans is faulty, etc.
Lights.
MJ (major) alarm: Two or more system cooling

fans are faulty, etc.
OFF
No failure is detected.
Green
Link is established between CPU #0 and EMA card.
OFF
Link is not established between CPU #0 and EMA card.
Green
Link is established between CPU #1 and EMA card.
OFF
Link is not established between CPU #1 and EMA card.
Green
CPU #0 is in ACT state.
OFF
CPU #0 is not in ACT state.
Green
CPU #1 is in ACT state.
OFF
CPU #1 is not in ACT state.
Red
Red
OFF
SW00 switch
Flashes in 1-second cycle.

Red
OFF
ALM lamp
DESCRIPTION
MB (SUB)
PFT
SYS LOCK
SYS SEL
REMARKS
Lights when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #0

(software operation failure during the system is operating).
Flashes when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #0
(software operation failure on starting up the system).
Lights when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #1
(software operation failure during the system is operating).
Flashes when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #1
(software operation failure on starting up the system).
No alarm is detected.
To supply power to EMA SUB-A and EMA SUB-B cards.
To start NCU manually.
Fixed to OFF (down).
PBI No. switch
To identify the system among multiple SV8500 servers.
INIT switch
To execute system initialization on SV8500 server (non-load initialization).
SW10
WHAT IS SV8500?
To specify music-on-hold.
For more details, refer to Section 4.2.3 Inserting EMA, EMA SUB, EXB, and IOC Cards in
Chapter 3.
12
This switch is placed

inside the card.
CHAPTER 1
3.2.3
WHAT IS SV8500?
IOC Card
CONN connector
OPE lamp
SW00 switch
Port0
MBR AUX
ALM
Port1
Port2
Port3
SDRD
1
0
OPE
CONN
DRER
RSCD
SW00
Port0 ~ Port3 lamps

ALM lamp
COLOR/
SW Number
NAME
Green
OPE lamp
ALM lamp
MBR
DESCRIPTION
REMARKS
Lights when IOC card is operating normally.
OFF
IOC card is in make-busy state or any operation error occurs.
Red
Lights when any operation error occurs.
OFF
ON (1)
To set make-busy request on IOC card.
OFF (0)
To cancel make-busy request on IOC card.

To display PCI-E link status on Port3s RS lamp for #0 and CD lamp
for #1.
SW00 switch
AUX
Port0-3 SD lamp
Port0-3 RD lamp
Port0-3 DR lamp
Port0-3 ER lamp
Port0-3 RS lamp
Port0-3 CD lamp
CONN connector
S2 switch
ON (1)
OFF:
PCI-E link is not established.
Flashes: PCI-E link is established and in STBY state.
Lights: PCI-E link is established and in ACT state.
OFF (0)
PCI-E link state is not to be displayed.
Green
Lights when sending RS-232C signal.
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
OFF
-
Not sending RS-232C signal.

Lights when receiving RS-232C signal.
Not receiving RS-232C signal.
Lights when receiving RS-232C DSR signal.
Not receiving RS-232C DSR signal.
Lights when sending RS-232C DTR signal.
Not sending RS-232C DTR signal.
Lights when sending RS-232C RTS signal.
Not sending RS-232C RTS signal.
Lights when receiving RS-232C CD signal.
Not receiving RS-232C CD signal.
Accommodates four RS-232C ports.
Identifies card inserted slot (IOC #0 or #1) and SMDR settings.

For more details, refer to Section 4.2.3 Inserting EMA, EMA SUB, EXB, and IOC
Cards in Chapter 3.
13
SV 4PORT CA-A cable is

connected to.
This switch is placed inside the card.
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
3.3 Switches, Lamps and Connectors on Rear Panel
Switches, lamps, and connectors on the rear panel of each card in SV8500 server are explained. The figure below
shows DC-Powered Model as an example.
SV8500 Server (Rear)
[EMA SUB-A card]

PW
R
IMG0
PW
R
IMG1
[EMA SUB-B card]
MU
SIC
EXAL
[EXB card #1]
IMG2
IMG3
AC
PW
R
[EXB card #0]
TSWR
TSWR
MISC
MISC
AC
PW
R
TSWR
MISC
[ System #1 ]
REAR
[ System #0 ]
[Power module]
14
CHAPTER 1
3.3.1
WHAT IS SV8500?
Power Module
AC-Powered Model
!
WARNING
PACT
System cooling FAN
CAUTION
WARNING
PACT
PWR lamp
AC power inlet
Power switch
DC-Powered Model
!
WARNING
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
(COMMON)
PACT
System cooling FAN
CAUTION
WARNING
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
(COMMON)
PACT
PWR lamp
Power switch
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Power receiving terminals
REMARKS
AC power inlet
AC-Powered Model:
Connector for receiving source power.
AC 100V (50/60 Hz) 10%

AC 120V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 230V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 240V (50/60 Hz) 10%
DC power receiving terminals
DC-Powered Model:
Connector for receiving source power from BASEU.
DC -48V 10%
Power switch
Switch to left/right to turn the power ON/OFF.
PWR lamp
Green
Lights when power is ON.
OFF
Power is OFF.
System cooling FAN
For cooling the SV8500 server module.
15
FANs can be changed during the system

is operating.
CHAPTER 1
3.3.2
WHAT IS SV8500?
EMA SUB-A Card

MUSIC connector
IMG0 connector
EXALM connector
IMG0
MUSIC
EXALM
PWR
PWR lamp
NAME
PWR lamp
DESCRIPTION
REMARKS
Green
Lights when EMA SUB-A card is powered ON.
OFF
EMA SUB-A card is powered OFF.
IMG0 connector
For detecting the alarm on IMG0.
MUSIC connector
For sending music-on-hold to TSW.
EXALM connector
For connecting external alarm indicating panel or for

receiving external music-on-hold source.
3.3.3
Used for 1-IMG system only.
EMA SUB-B Card

IMG2 connector
IMG1 connector
IMG3 connector
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3
TSWR
MISCR
PWR
PWR lamp
MISCR connector
TSWR connector
NAME
PWR lamp
DESCRIPTION
Green
Lights when EMA SUB-B card is powered ON.
OFF
EMA SUB-B card is powered OFF.
IMG1 connector
IMG2 connector
IMG3 connector
TSWR connector
For detecting the alarm on TSW.
MISCR
For detecting the alarm on MISC.
16
REMARKS
CHAPTER 1
3.3.4
WHAT IS SV8500?
EXB Card
EXB-PIR card for 1-IMG

PIR connector
PWR lamp
MISCR connector
PIR
MISCR
PWR
ACT
ACT lamp
NAME
Orange
PWR lamp
OFF
Green
ACT lamp
OFF
DESCRIPTION
Lights when CPU is in ACT state.
Flashes when CPU is in STBY state.
Remains off when EXB card is in make-busy state.
Lights after completing the EXB cards initialization.
Flashes when link error occurs.
Remains OFF when the EXB card is on initializing.
PIR connector
For communicating with PIR.
MISCR connector
For communicating with MISCR.
REMARKS
EXB-TSWR card for 4-IMG

TSWR connector
PWR lamp
MISCR connector
TSWR
MISCR
PWR
ACT
ACT lamp
NAME
PWR lamp
Orange
OFF
ACT lamp
Green
OFF
DESCRIPTION
Lights when CPU is in ACT state.
Flashes when CPU is in ST-BY state.
Remains off when EXB card is in make-busy state.
Lights after completing the EXB cards initialization.
Flashes when link error occurs.
Remains OFF when the EXB card is on initializing.
TSWR connector
For communicating with TSWR.
MISCR connector
For communicating with MISCR.
17
REMARKS
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
4. SV8500 with PIR

Connecting Port Interface Rack (PIR) modules to SV8500 server enables the system to accommodate circuit
cards for trunk/line interface. PIR provides SV8500 with the connection of analog telephone and Digital terminal stations, existing analog PSTN lines and Tie lines, supporting the service features equivalent to conventional
PBX system.
FANU
PIR
AC-DC Power Unit
Note 1
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
PWR
LOA
D
ON
LINE
LINE
SPEED
PWR
LINE
SPEED
SYS
ALM
SYS
PWR
LOA
LINE
D
ON
LINE
SPEED
LINE
SYS
LINK
1
0
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB)
PFT
SPEED
SV8500 server
SYS
LOCK SYS
SEL
2
SWO0
1
SWO1
INIT
PBI
No.
LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED
EM
2
3
LINE
A MA
IN
SPEED
LINE
SPEED
FRONT
Note 1: AC-DC Power Unit is mounted on AC-Powered Model (Component Type) only.
18
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
Network Configuration Example
Tie line
ELC
PIR
TLT
Digital terminal
LC
Analog TEL
PIR
Analog PSTN
COT
PIR
ISDN
PIR
IP PAD
MG(PRI/BRI)
SIP
MG(SIP)
IP terminal
SIP terminal
Software phone
SV8500 has the following types of PIR models:
AC-Powered Model (Component Type) for 1-IMG configuration
DC-Powered Model (Built-up Type) for 1-IMG and 4-IMG configuration
Hardware specification, system configuration, and slot accommodation of each type of PIR are described in the
following sections.
19
CHAPTER 1
4.1
WHAT IS SV8500?
AC-Powered Model (Component Type)
This section shows the specifications for AC-Powered Model of PIR.

4.1.1
Hardware Specifications
Total weights
Approx. 30 kg (1,058.2 oz)

(maximum accommodation of AC-DC Power Unit + PIR + FANU(H))
Input power source for AC-DC

Power Unit
Two AC inlets for dual AC power input (#0 and #1)

AC 100V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 120V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 230V (50/60 Hz) 10%
AC 240V (50/60 Hz) 10%
Parallel two-pole with grounding
Input power for PIR
DC Terminal Unit accommodates Power Receiving Terminal (-48VR, -48V,

+80V and FG connection)
768 W (-48V: 16A)
Dimensions
437 530.4 354 mm (1 5.21 1 8.88 1 1.94 inch), excluding the brackets
19-inch rack mount, 10U-box (1U-power + 8U-PIR + 1U-FANU) Note 1
(*see the figure Front View)
Maximum module configuration
Four PIRs of 1-IMG configuration (*4-IMG configuration is not supported)
Number of universal slot
17 slots (maximum 384 ports)
Quake-proof strength
Horizontal accelerated-resistance to 1.1G
Other conditions
A FANU and a AC-DC Power Unit are required for each PIR.
Note 1: Prepare a proper 19-inch rack to mount the above size of module. See Section 3. Installing 19-Inch Rack
in Chapter 3 for other conditions.
20
CHAPTER 1
4.1.2
WHAT IS SV8500?
Components
The following figures show the components.

Front View
1U
]
U
PZ-M699
A
F
8U
Card stopper
]
IR
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Cable duct
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1U
[ AC
-DC
Po
we
Note:
rU
nit
]
Refer to Section 5. Mounting Second Power Unit on AC-DC Power Unit for Dual Power Configuration in
Chapter 4 for the way to install dual power unit.
21
CHAPTER 1
Rear View
[ FA
NU
]
Connectors
[P
IR
Rear cover
Connectors
[ AC
-DC
Po
22
we
rU
nit
WHAT IS SV8500?
CHAPTER 1
4.1.3
WHAT IS SV8500?
Module Configuration
The figure below shows the module configuration example of SV8500 with AC-powered model of PIR. Up to
four PIRs can be accommodated per SV8500 server.
Module Configuration Example for SV8500 with PIR (AC-Powered Model)
1-PIR (minimum)
2-PIR
3-PIR
4-PIR (maximum)
FANU
FANU
PIR 2
PIR 2
AC-DC
AC-DC
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 1
PIR 1
PIR 1
AC-DC
AC-DC
AC-DC
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
FANU
AC-DC
AC-DC
AC-DC
AC-DC
PIR 3
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
AC-DC
max. 384 physical ports

PIR:
Port Interface Rack
AC-DC: AC-DC Power Unit
FANU: FAN unit
Note:
Be sure to mount the set of PIR0 (AC-DC Power Unit + PIR + FANU) right above the SV8500 server module in the same rack. PIR1~PIR3 can be mounted on other 19-inch rack within the reach of the bus cable
(about 1.5m). Take the cable length into consideration when the 19-inch rack has side and rear covers. FG
connection is also required between AC-DC Power Unit and PIR. Refer to Section 4.3.2 Power Cable and
Bus Cable Connection for AC-Powered Model in Chapter 4 for the details.
23
CHAPTER 1
4.1.4
WHAT IS SV8500?
Circuit Card Mounting Location
The figure below shows the slot configuration and the condition of mounted circuit card types.
Slot Accommodation on PIR (AC-Powered Model)
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
HW0 HW1 HW2
HW6 HW7 HW8
HW4
HW3 HW5
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32
HW10
HW9
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
Accommodating LT connector
Controlling Circuit Card on PIR

SLOT NUMBER
FUNCTION OF
CIRCUIT CARD
01
PWR
03
DPWR
DESCRIPTION
DC-DC power converter to supply operating power to each circuit card on

PIR. Converting DC-48V input, this card outputs DC+5V, -5V, and +12V.
Also it is equipped with ringing and howler tone generating circuit.
13, 14 on PIR 0
TSW
Time Division Switching (TSW) with INT, MUX (including CFT), and
PLO are combined. TSW switches 2048 2048 time slots. INT is an intermediate circuit between CPR and Port Microprocessor (PM) on line/trunk
card via PM bus.
13, 14 on PIR 1~3
MUX
Provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing voice Pulse Code

Modulation (PCM) information and digital data information, in between
CPR and Port Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit.
Slots 04~12 and 15~22 are the universal slots to mount any line/trunk cards.
Each universal slot has communication path called highway (HW) for multiplexing PCM signal on line/trunk
circuit. Every 32ch of PCM signal is sent out to MUX and then transferred to TSW after being multiplexed. The
multiplexed PCM signal is transferred to MUX from TSW through switching process. The PCM signal is parted
by 32ch of HW on MUX and distributed to each line/trunk.
The number of time slots in the figure above shows the unit for multiplexing/de-multiplexing PCM signal on
the applied slot.
Make sure to mount the channels of one card consisting of 32 time slots (such as DTI) on the same HW. If these
channels across HWs, call processing cannot be operated normally.
24
CHAPTER 1
4.2
WHAT IS SV8500?
DC-Powered Model (Built-up Type)
This section shows the specifications for DC-Powered Model of PIR.

4.2.1
Hardware Specifications
Hardware Specifications of PIR
Total weight
Approx. 30 kg (1,058.2 oz) (maximum accommodation)
Input source power on BASEU
DC -48V 10%
Input power on PIR from BASEU
DC Terminal Unit accommodates DC power receiving terminals (-48VR, -48V,

768W (DC -48V: 16A)
Outside dimension
437 530.4 354 mm (1 5.21 1 8.88 1 1.94 inch), excluding the brackets
19-inch rack mount, 8U-box (9U-box when FANU is mounted) Note 1
(*see the figure Front View: Bottom-Mounted PIR for 2-PIR, 3-PIR or 4-PIR
Configuration of IMG)
1-IMG configuration: 4 PIRs

4-IMG configuration: 16 PIRs
Number of universal slot
17 slots (maximum 384 ports)
Other conditions
A BASEU and a FANU are required per IMG.
Hardware Specifications of TSWR (for 4-IMG Configuration)

Total weight
Approx. 35 kg (1,234.6 oz) (maximum accommodation)
Input source power on BASEU
DC -48V 10%
Input power on TSWR from

BASEU
DC Terminal Unit accommodates DC power receiving terminals (-48VR, -48V,

480W (-48V: 10A)
Outside dimension
483 421 399 mm (1 7.02 1 4.58 1 3.71 inch), excluding the brackets
19-inch rack mount, 9U-box including FANU Note 1
One TSWR per 4-IMG system
Number of circuit card slot
14 slots
Note 1: Prepare any proper 19-inch racks to mount the above size of module. See Section 3. Installing 19-Inch Rack
in Chapter 3 for other conditions.
25
CHAPTER 1
4.2.2
WHAT IS SV8500?
Components
The following figures show the components.

Front View: Bottom-Mounted PIR for 2-PIR, 3-PIR or 4-PIR Configuration of IMG
1U
]
U
PZ-M699
A
F
8U
Card stopper
]
IR
[
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Cable duct
18
19
20
21
22
26
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
Front View: PIR for 1-PIR Configuration of IMG
1U
]
U
PZ-M699
A
F
8U
Card stopper
]
IR
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Cable duct
19
20
21
22
Front View: Top-Mounted PIR for 2-PIR, 3-PIR, or 4-PIR Configuration of IMG
8U
Card stopper
]
IR
[
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Cable duct
18
19
20
21
22
27
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
Rear View: Bottom-Mounted PIR for 2-PIR, 3-PIR, or 4-PIR Configuration of IMG
[ FA
NU
Connectors
Rear cover
[P
IR
]
Connectors
Note:
FANU is installed on the bottom-mounted PIR only.
28
CHAPTER 1
Rear View: PIR for 1-PIR Configuration of IMG
Connectors
Rear cover
[ FA
NU
]
[P
IR
]
Connectors
29
WHAT IS SV8500?
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
Rear View: Top-Mounted PIR for 2-PIR, 3-PIR, or 4-PIR Configuration of IMG
Connectors
Rear cover
[P
IR
Connectors
30
CHAPTER 1
4.2.3
WHAT IS SV8500?
Module Configuration
The figures below show the module configuration of SV8500 with DC-powered model of PIR.
[1-IMG configuration]
Up to four PIRs can be accommodated per SV8500 server.
Module Configuration Example for SV8500 with PIR (DC-Powered Model: 1-IMG)
1-PIR (minimum)
3-PIR
2-PIR
4-PIR (maximum)
PIR 3
PIR 2
PIR 2
PIR 1
PIR 1
PIR 1
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
max. 1152 physical ports max. 1536 physical ports

PIR:
Port Interface Rack
FANU: FAN unit
BASEU: Base unit
Note:
- Be sure to mount the set of PIR0 (PIR + FANU) right above the SV8500 server module in the same rack.
- PIR1 ~ PIR3 need to be mounted closely, without unnecessary space.
31
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
[4-IMG configuration]
Up to 16 PIRs can be accommodated per a set of SV8500 server and TSWR.
Module Configuration Example for SV8500 with PIR (DC-Powered Model: 4-IMG)
IMG 0
IMG 1
IMG 2
PIR 3
PIR 7
PIR 11
PIR 15
PIR 2
PIR 6
PIR 10
PIR 14
PIR 1
PIR 5
PIR 9
PIR 13
TSWR
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
SV8500
server
PIR 0
PIR 4
PIR 8
PIR 12
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
IMG 3
max. 3,072 physical ports

PIR:
Port Interface Rack
FANU: FAN unit
BASEU: Base unit
Note:
- Be sure to mount TSWR right above the SV8500 server module in the same rack.
- FANU and the bottom-mounted PIR configure a set of module. The second, third, and the top PIRs need
to be mounted closely, without unnecessary space.
Conditions for Module Mounting Position
UNIT/MODULE
PIR MODULE
CONFIGURATION
MOUNTNG POSITION
FANU
Required for 1-PIR, 2-PIR, 3-PIR,

and 4-PIR configuration of IMGs.
Install a FANU right above the bottommounted PIR on each IMG (PIR0, PIR4, PIR8,
PIR12).
TSWR
Required for 4-IMG configuration.
Install a TSWR right above the SV8500 server

module.
Required for 4-IMG

configuration.
BASEU
Install a BASEU at the bottom of each IMG.
Power distributing unit for

DC-Powered Model
32
REMARKS
CHAPTER 1
4.2.4
WHAT IS SV8500?
Circuit Card Mounting Location
The figure below shows the slot configuration and the condition of mounted circuit card types.
Slot Accommodation on PIR (DC-Powered Model)
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
HW0 HW1 HW2
HW6 HW7 HW8
HW4
HW3 HW5
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32
HW10
HW9
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
Accommodating LT connector
Controlling Circuit Card on PIR

SLOT NUMBER
FUNCTION OF
CIRCUIT CARD
01
PWR
03
DPWR
1-IMG:
13, 14 on PIR0
1-IMG:
13, 14 on PIR1~PIR3
4-IMG:
13, 14 on PIR0~PIR15
DESCRIPTION
DC-DC power converter to supply operating power to each circuit card on PIR.
Converting DC-48V input, this card outputs DC+5V, -5V, and +12V. Also it is
equipped with ringing and howler tone generating circuit.
TSW
Time Division Switching (TSW) with INT, MUX (including CFT), and PLO
are combined. TSW switches 2048 2048 time slots. INT is an intermediate circuit between CPR and Port Microprocessor (PM) on line/trunk card via PM bus.
MUX
Provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) information and digital data information, in between CPR and
Port Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit.
Slots 04~12 and 15~22 are the universal slot to mount any line/trunk cards.
Each universal slot has communication path called highway (HW) for multiplexing PCM signal on line/trunk
circuit. Every 32ch of PCM signal is sent out to MUX and then transferred to TSW after being multiplexed. The
multiplexed PCM signal is transferred to MUX from TSW through switching process. The PCM signal is parted
by 32ch of HW on MUX and distributed to each line/trunk.
The number of time slots in the figure above shows the unit for multiplexing/de-multiplexing PCM signal on
the applied slot.
Make sure to mount the channels of one card consisting of 32 time slots (such as DTI) on the same HW. If these
channels across HWs, call processing cannot be operated normally.
33
CHAPTER 1
WHAT IS SV8500?
Slot Accommodation on TSWR (DC-Powered Model: 4-IMG)
PLO 1
PLO 0
TSW 13
TSW 12
TSW 11
TSW 10
TSW 03
TSW 02
TSW 01
TSW 00
GT 01
GT 00
DLKC 01
00 01
DLKC 00
DC-DC PWR 1 (DPWR)
DC-DC PWR 0 (PWR)
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
Controlling Circuit Card on TSWR

SLOT NUMBER
FUNCTION OF
CIRCUIT CARD
DESCRIPTION
00, 01
PWR
Supplies DC -48V operating power to the circuit cards mounted on TSWR, and also
provides DC-DC converter function to generate and output DC +5V, -5V and +12V
power.
02, 03
DLKC
Broadcasts ATT calls termination/answer/release (abandoned) information and

idle/busy state of stations from SV8500 server to all the Attendant Consoles (ATTs)
via TSW link, supporting the following functions:
- ATT transfer data receiving buffer
- format converting of ATT transfer data
- serial sending/receiving of ATT transfer data
04, 05
GT
Provides SV8500 server with the interface for controlling TSW, PLO, and DLKC via
TSW I/O bus.
TSW
Provides Time Division Switching (TSW) function. Each TSW card is capable of
8192 2048 time slot (TS) switching per IMG. Four cards provides 8192 8192 TS
switching for 4-IMG configuration.
PLO
Provides system clock to each feature. Extracting the source clock signal from digital
trunk or Digital Clock Supply (DCS), PLO makes the system synchronizing with
network and external clock source, by supplying the system with clock signal under
the phase synchronization of oscillators base clock signal.
06 ~ 13
14, 15
34
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
INSTALLATION DESIGN
This chapter explains the installation design for preparing required installation environment and materials.
1. Equipment Room Requirements
Ensure that the equipment room meets the specified conditions. Also take the future expansion into consideration.
1.1 Floor Space
SV8500 system operation also requires floor capacity for operation and maintenance area in addition to the setting space for Telephony Servers main module, peripheral equipment, and MDF. Dimension of the system
equipment and required operation room are described in the tables below.
Dimensions and Weights of System Equipment
DIMENSIONS
Unit: mm (inch)
width depth height
WEIGHTS
Unit: kg (oz)
483 484 132

(1 7.02" 1 7.06" 5.20")
Approx. 16 kg (564.4 oz)

(maximum accommodation)
PIR
483 530.4 354

(1 7.02" 1 8.88" 1 1.94")
Approx. 30 kg (1,058.2 oz)

TSWR
483 421 399

(1 7.02" 1 4.58" 1 3.71")
Approx. 20 kg (705.5 oz)

480 94.9 285.2

(1 6.90" 3.74" 11.23")
5.8 kg (204.6 oz)
595 600 2,000

(1 11.43" 1 11.62" 6 6.74")
280 kg (9,876.7 oz)

EQUIPMENT
SV8500 server
MDF
SV8500 RACK (39U)
Note:
REMARKS
Rack mount 8U-box
Be sure to check on the dimensions, because there may be size change.

Operation Room
FRONT MARGIN
Unit: mm (inch)
REAR MARGIN
Unit: mm (inch)
SV8500
1,000 (3 3.37")
600 (1 11.62")
PIR
1,000 (3 3.37")
600 (1 11.62")
TSWR
1,000 (3 3.37")
600 (1 11.62")
MDF
1,000 (3 3.37")
600 (1 11.62")
Maintenance console (PCPro)
1,200 (3 11.24")
800 (2 7.50")
EQUIPMENT
Note:
REMARKS
Leave 600 mm (1 11.62" inch) of side margins to the wall.
The space for operation room in this table is an example for reference. It may be different according to the
equipment room conditions.
35
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
1.2 Floor Load
Required floor capacities are as follows:

Equipment Room:
more than 3430 Pa (71.7 pounds/square foot)
Operator Room:
more than 2940 Pa (61.4 pounds/square foot)
1.3 Floor Surface
1.
Switching Equipment Room

The maximum difference in floor level at any point within the room should be less than +5 mm (0.2
inch).
The floor should be an elevated-type floor such as a free-access floor or computer room floor.
2.
Battery Room
The floor should have a slope of 1/1000, and a drain at the end of the slope.
The floor surface should be made of acid-resistant materials.
3.
Floor Construction
The floor should have a slope of 1/1000, and a drain at the end of the slope.
The floor surface should be made of acid-resistant materials.
1.4 Wall, Ceiling, and Window
1.
Wall
Use concrete to permit the installation of cable racks (in the absence of a free-access floor).
Apply paint to avoid generating dust, etc.
Ensure that the maximum difference in surface level is less than +5 mm (0.2 inches).
2.
Ceiling
The minimum ceiling height is 2.3 meters (7.5 feet).
3.
Window
Keep all of the windows closed if the location is affected by dust, sea breeze or corrosive gas. Curtains
or blinds are necessary to avoid direct sunlight.
1.5 Lighting Facilities
1.
Switching Equipment Room

Fluorescent lamps are recommended.
The floor-level illumination must be at least 200 lux (18.6 foot-candles).
2.
Operator Room
Fluorescent lamps are recommended.
36
CHAPTER 2
3.
INSTALLATION DESIGN
Battery Room
Anti-explosion type lamps are required.
2. Power Supply Requirements

2.1 Main Source Power
SV8500 requires operating power of AC 100V ~ 240V (50/60 Hz) 10% and DC -48V 10%. The DC operating power is supplied from the rectifier, that receives AC power from the commercial AC power source. For
greater system reliability, it is recommended that Telephony Server be supplied with backup DC operating power, capable of providing power for a predetermined duration, from the batteries installed as the auxiliary power
supply source.
The batteries for Telephony Server must be connected in parallel with the -48V DC output of the rectifier. When
installing the batteries, place an EMF panel in-line (series) with the input -48V DC supplied to Telephony Server. This panel is necessary when changing the state of the rectifier from float to equalize, and vice versa.
Note:
When the rectifier is in the equalize state (charging the batteries), the output DC voltage should be 1.5 volts
to 2 volts higher than the float voltage. Please refer to the voltages for floating and equalizing below:
Float:
Equalize:
Note:
50.5V DC
52V DC Note 1
The noise that is present in the -48V output from the rectifier should be less than 5mV.
Note 1: The equalize voltage is 1.5 volts to 2 volts higher when an EMF panel (Diode Drop) is used. When an EMF
panel is not used, the float and equalize voltage must be the same (50.5 V).
37
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
2.2 Current Consumption
DC-DC converter in each module provides various DC voltages required within the system. The DC-DC converter, upon receiving the -48V DC source power, converts it into various DC voltages and supplies them to the
associated circuits.
The figure below shows the current consumption of Telephony Server with respect to the quantity of ports.
Telephony Server Current Consumption
(AMPS)
35
30
25
DC
-48V
20
15
10
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Quantity of Ports
2.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements
Install the Power Distribution Box (PDB) with the following considerations:
1.
Provide a dedicated AC power source service outlet and junction box fuse for the switching equipment.
2.
Attach a warning notice to the PDB circuit breaker so that it will not be turned off accidentally.
3.
Install the PDB at a location that is easy to reach.
4.
Install the PDB at a location where the connecting cables that extend to the switching equipment will not
be accidentally broken.
5.
Run the PDB cables in a manner that will not hamper the installation.
6.
Provide a separate AC service outlet for maintenance console such as PCPro.
38
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
2.4 Grounding
The system grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and be connected to a
predetermined terminal in Telephony Server.
The standard grounding requirements are shown below.
Communication grounding:
Less than 1
Security ground for Module Group:
Less than 1
Grounding for the MDF line protector:
Less than 1
Note:
The AC ripple of various types of grounding should be less than 1/2 V-pp.
3. Air Conditioning Requirements

Telephony Server is sensitive to increases in temperature and humidity, as is a computer. Air conditioning may
be required.
3.1 Temperature And Humidity
The table below shows the environmental conditions that are required in the switching equipment room. If the
switching system is operated in an environment that does not meet these specifications, the reliability of the
switching equipment may be impaired. Improper operating conditions can cause circuit boards, etc. to
deteriorate. Therefore, to enable the equipment to operate for the full extent of its expected lifetime, give careful
consideration to the location of the equipment and to proper ventilation and air conditioning. If equipment is not
provided to remove the heat generated by the system, or if the temperature or humidity fluctuate repeatedly, the
systems electronic parts can be adversely affected. Such conditions will promote the corrosion of metal parts
and the deterioration of insulation, thereby lowering the overall reliability of the system.
Temperature and Humidity
TEMPERATURE
During
Operations
Normal Operation
15C - 27C (59F -80F)
Short Period Note 1
0C - 40C (32F-104F)
During Storage and In Transit

Temperature Change
RELATIVE
HUMIDITY
REMARKS
15% - 90%
18C - 50C (0F -122F)
8% - 90%
Maximum 5C/30 Min. (41F/30 Min.)
90%
Non-condensing
Note 1: A short period does not exceed three consecutive days (72 hours), or 15 days (360 hours) within a year.
39
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
3.2 Switching Equipment Heat Generation
The figure below shows the heat generated from the switching equipment, with respect to the current consumed
by the quantity of ports.
Switching Equipment Heat Generation
BTU/hour
3.5K
3.0K
2.5K
2.0K
1.5K
1.0K
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Quantity of Ports
Note:
One British Thermal Unit (BTU) =1058.4J
4. Preparation of Trunking Diagram

4.1 Preparing the Trunking Diagram
Prepare the trunking diagram according to the customers specifications since different types of switching offices, such as single offices and network offices, are involved.
4.2 Preparing the Module Group Face Layout and the Port Accommodation Diagram
When finalizing the circuit card placement, prepare the Module Group Face Layout and the Port Accommodation Diagram.
4.3 Preparing the Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets
Prepare the Switch Setting Sheets for the circuit cards mounted on the PIR. Some of the circuit cards may not
operate properly with the initial factory switch settings or may not meet the customers specifications. Referring
to the Circuit Card Manual, note the switch settings in the Switch Setting Sheets that are provided with the circuit card explanations. Make the switch setting entries for all of the circuit cards.
40
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
Remember that a circuit cards purpose and role vary with its switch setting.
5. INSTALLATION CABLES
The following installation cables are required for Telephony Server:
CABLE TYPE
USAGE
DC power cable
For connections between rectifier and batteries, between rectifier and

BASEU.
AC power cable
For supplying AC source power to rectifier, AC input type of peripheral

equipment and PIR.
Ground cable
Communication, security and line protector grounding.
25P shielded cable with a CHAMP (amphenol) connector at one end
For connections between MDF and LT connector on PIR.
25P shielded cable with CHAMP (amphenol)

connectors at both ends
For connections between RS-232C connect type of peripheral equipment

and Telephony Server.
Local cable (pair cable, modular cable)
For connections between terminals (telephone sets, etc.) and the MDF
Cables for C.O. line and Tie line
For connections between external lines (C.O. line and Tie line, etc.) and
the MDF
Others
For connections between Alarm Indicators and MDF
41
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
5.1 AC Input, DC Power, and Ground Cables
1.
Use VCT (Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable) for AC input cable. If shielding is necessary, which is the
case when AC input cable is installed in parallel with a low-voltage power cable, etc., use VCT-S (Shielded
Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable).
2.
For the main ground cable, use an IV or CV cable of more than 14 mm2 (AWG 6).
For the maintenance console security ground cable and the externally installed equipment, use an IV cable
of 2 mm2 (AWG 14). For the ground cable for the MDF line protector, use an IV cable of 14 mm2 (AWG 6).
DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (Single IMG)
Battery
Cables
Rectifier
Telephony Server
Battery
IV (BL)
IV (R)
-48V
G
Power And
Ground Cables
CV or IV
-48V -48VR
+80V
IV (R)
IV (BL)
AC Power
Distribution
Board
-48V
G
E
FE
PCPro
AC Service
Outlet
IV (G) (e.g. AWG 14)
VCT Cable
Earth Bar
MDF
G
IV (G)
(e.g. AWG 6)
Ground
Terminal
Note:
Battery, AC Power Distribution Board, and Rectifier need to be locally arranged. This figure is an example
for power and ground cable connection. The connection may vary depending on the installed rectifier type.
Note:
If the cover of the CV Cable is black, use the following clamp cover terminals so they can be easily identified.
-48V: Blue cover G: Red cover E: Green cover
Note:
Alarm from the rectifier is connected to MPALM on the power module. Alarm is issued when 0 level is
detected.
42
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable (Multiple IMGs)

Battery
Cables
IMG 0
Rectifier
IMG 1
Battery
IV (BL)
IV (R)
AC Power
Distribution
Board
IMG 2
IMG 3
-48V
G
-48V -48VR +80V
-48V -48VR +80V
-48V -48VR +80V
-48V -48VR +80V
IV (BL)
IV (R)
VCT
Cables
-48V
G
E
Power and Ground Cables
FE
AC Service Outlet
PCPro
IV (G)
(e.g. AWG 14)
iv (g)
MDF
Earth Bar
G
IV (G)
(e.g. AWG 6)
Ground
Terminal
Note:
Battery, AC Power Distribution Board, and Rectifier need to be locally arranged. This figure is an example
for power and ground cable connection. The connection may vary depending on the installed rectifier type.
Note:
If the cover of the CV Cable is black, use the following clamp cover terminals so they can be easily identified.
-48V: Blue cover G: Red cover E: Green cover
Note:
Alarm from the rectifier is connected to MPALM on the power module. Alarm is issued when 0 level is
detected.
Note:
A lightning strike might cause voltage differences between IMGs, and damage the electrical circuits. To
prevent this, use a single main power to connect all the IMGs. Keep the connecting cables, between the
terminal boards, as short as possible.
43
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
5.2 Cables between Telephony Server and MDF
With respect to lines, trunks and NCUs (PFTs), Telephony Server and MDF are connected using 25P shielded
cables with a CHAMP (amphenol) connector at one end.
The table below shows the formulae for calculating the required quantity of cables. The following figures show
outline of cable connections from the Module Group to outside.
Cable Quantities Calculation
CABLE NAME
LT cable (LT0 ~ LT11 connectors)
Night Change Unit (NCU) cable
CALCULATION
SUB TOTAL
Quantity of PIRs 12
Quantity of Power Failure Transfer (PFT) circuit cards 2
EXALM cable
ODT cable
Quantity of TLT circuit cards 1
PLO cable
IMG 1
EXCLK cable
IMG 2
TOTAL:
44
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
Outline of Cable Connection from Module Group to Outside

Connector
Designation
Connector
Designation
Lead
Designation
MDF
Lead
Designation
Telephony Server
MDF
LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx
LT-X Axx
COT
LC
LT-X Bxx
LT-X Axx
Installation
Cable
To C.O.
or
destination
node
LT-X Bxx
TLT
LT-X Bxx
LT-X Mxx
Installation
Cable
LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx
COT
LC
NCU-X-AOx
NCU-X-BOx
NCU-X-Alx
NCU-X ROx
NCU-X TOx
NCU-X Rlx
NCU-X Tlx
NCU-X-Blx
PFT
ALM MJ
ALM MN
TO ALARM
INDICATOR
ALM E
Installation
Cable
Note 1: Legend
Note 2:
LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx
Installation
Cable
D15F EXALM CA-A
: Male CONNECTOR
: Female CONNECTOR.
or
indicates that the CONNECTOR ended. Connect the cable between the module
connector and MDF.
45
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
6. MDF Requirements
Use either a self-standing or a wall-mounted Main Distribution Frame (MDF). The MDF must be equipped with
the following types of terminal blocks:
arrester board for C.O. lines and external lines
test spring terminals for localization tests
local block terminals.
Telephony Servers circuit configuration and the quantity of local lines determine the quantity of terminals.
46
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION DESIGN
7. INSTALLATION TOOLS
The table below lists the tools used in a typical system installation.
Typical Installation Tools
FUNCTION
TOOLS
PURPOSE
Leveling and
marking
Steel Tape Measure

L-Square
Iron Square
Iron Level
Center Punch
Step Ladder
Scriber
Leveling and
marking plumb line
Drilling
Electric Drill
Electric Vibration Drill
Hammer
Point Drill
Drill Bit for Concrete
Concrete Chisel
Drill Bit for Metal
Power Cable Drum
Extension Cable
Drilling
Installing Module
Group and rack
Plumb Bob
Jigsaw
Hacksaw Frame
Hacksaw Blade
Flat File
Half Round File
Set File
Adjustable Angle Wrench
Frame Cart
Cutter
Set Wrench
Socket Wrench Set
Step Ladder
Phillips Screwdriver
Screwdriver
Plastic Hammer
Installing Module
Group and rack
Installing Power
Cable
Flat-blade driver
Miscellaneous
Circuit Tester
Pocket Measure
Scissors
Wire Clipper
Cable Cutter
Nipper
Wire Stripper
Round Nose Pliers
Non-Metallic Stick
Solder-Helper
Solder Sucker
IC Clip
Mini Test Probe
Installing power
cable
47
Telephone Set
Working Lamp
Wrapping Tool
Unwrapping Tool
Soldering Iron
Soldering Iron Stand
Connector Clamping Tool
Logic Checker and Counter
Pen Light
Precision Screwdriver (+)(-)
IC Buzzer
Tweezer
Portable Field Service Kit
Miscellaneous
CHAPTER 2
48
INSTALLATION DESIGN
CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION - SV8500 SERVER
This chapter explains the procedures for installing SV8500.

1. Site Surveying
1.1 Equipment Location Check
(1) Environmental Requirements
Temperature: 0C ~ 40C (32F ~ 104F)
Humidity: below 90% (non-condensing)
Main Source Power: AC 100V/120V/230V/240V 10% 50/60 Hz, DC -48V 10%
(2) Floor Conditions

Do not place SV8500 system under any of the conditions listed below, doing so can cause operational trouble, failure, or electrical shock.
On unstable floor, unsettled and sideling board
Locations which might be wet with water, oil, and chemicals
Dusty environment
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Locations which receive strong electric wave from other equipment
Any heavy equipment is loaded on the rack
Locations with poor heat dissipation or poor ventilation
Locations with vibration
1.2 Floor Layout Check
According to the floor layout, confirm the equipment locations are appropriate:
No obstructing objects, to allow easy maintenance
C.O. lines can be easily brought in
Local cables can be easily brought up to MDF
Communication and security ground can be obtained as required
1.3 Power and Ground Supply
Confirm that power and ground are provided.
AC voltage and current capacity is proper
49
CHAPTER 3
Circuit breaker (NFB) is provided exclusively for SV8500 system
Ground terminals are provided separately from those of power supply system
Single main power is provided to connect all of the IMGs
2. Installing Power Equipment

This section explains the procedure for installing the power equipment.
Note:
The circuit breaker (NFB) for the rectifier's DC output must remain OFF.
STEP 1: Install the power equipment at the predetermined location using anchor bolts, etc.
Install the framework for the backup batteries. Secure the framework using anchor
bolts, etc.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
STEP 2: Check the cabling at the primary and secondary sides of the power equipment and the cabling to the
batteries.
STEP 3: Confirm that the specifications of the customer-installed AC PDB (NFB capacity, voltage, phase,
etc.) conform to the rectifier specifications.
STEP 4: Confirm that the correct communication ground is available.
STEP 5: Connect the input power cable and grounding cable to the rectifier.
STEP 6: Supply electrolyte to each battery according to the batterys specifications.
STEP 7: Charge the batteries, after verifying that the rectifier is operating normally.
50
CHAPTER 3
3. Installing 19-Inch Rack

Place the rack for securing SV8500 module referring to the attached setting guide of your rack.
3.1 Requirements
Use any 19-inch rack that meets the following maximum loading conditions.
Oscillatory waveform:
Vibrational frequency:
Shock wave:
Quake-proof strength:
Sine wave
Minimum 5Hz
30 waves
1.1G
Here describes the 19-inch rack setting procedure when 39U type of rack is used as an example.
ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Width
595 mm
Outside Dimension Depth
600 mm
Unit Mount Part
Height
Pitch
Width between holes
2000 mm
44.45 mm
465 0.5 mm
Front opening width
452 0.5 mm
Front margins
Screw
Fastening bracket
IEC standard
75 mm
M5 tapping screw
Supplied with SV8500 server
44.45 mm
500 mm 500 mm 14.8
Floor Space
Rack Weight
39U
280 kg
100 kg or less
Anchor Bolt
M12 4
Loadage
REMARKS
Number of unit
Weight
Quake-proof Strength
1.1 G
51
* Maximum configuration
CHAPTER 3
3.2 19-Inch Rack Installing Procedure

START
Layout check
Marking
Leveling
Drilling
Securing the rack
END
STEP 1: Confirm the setting location on the floor. Determine the floor layout considering the following:
- C.O. lines can be easily brought in
- Local cables can be easily brought up to the MDF
- Power supply and current capacity is properly provided
- Communication and security ground can be obtained properly
- Requirements for equipment (loadage, size)
- Door opening/shutting, passage-way, and maintenance in equipment room
STEP 2: Marking
Referring to figures, mark the securing hole locations for the racks anchor bolts.
52
CHAPTER 3
<Single-rack layout>
Wall
Floor
650
(2' 1.59")
50
(1.97")
1200
(3' 11.24")
600
500
(1' 11.62") (1' 7.69")
50
(1.97")
47.5
(1.87")
500
(1' 7.69")
47.5
(1.87")
595
(1' 11.43")
Unit: mm (inch)
<Multiple-rack layout>
Wall
Floor
650
(2' 1.59")
50
(1.97")
1200
(3' 11.24")
600
500
(1' 11.62") (1' 7.69")
50
(1.97")
47.5
(1.87")
500
(1' 7.69")
47.5 40 47.5
(1.87") (1.57") (1.87")
500
(1' 7.69")
595
(1' 11.43")
135
(5.32")
1182.5
(3' 10.56")
53
Unit: mm (inch)
CHAPTER 3
STEP 3: Leveling
Measure the free-access floors surface level. If the floor is not leveled, adjust the floor level to the
rack using spacers. When special stand is used, adjust the level by inserting spacers between the floor
and the stand.
Rack
Leveling
Spacer
Floor
When setting on free-access floor

(1) Set the special stand on the marked location.
Rack
(2) Set a spirit level on the center of the

special stand.
(3) If the level meter does not read leveled, insert spacers to adjust the level.
Free-access floor
or computer floor
(4) Insert spacers into the front and rear

sides of the rack to adjust the level.
Special
stand
Spacer
Floor
Anchor bolt
54
(5) Be sure to check the level after securing the special stand with anchor bolts.
CHAPTER 3
STEP 4: Drilling
Drill holes at the marked locations on the free-access floor.
Prepare two types of drill bit, for preliminary holes (6f~8f) and main holes (17.5f). First drill preliminary holes using a small-diameter drill bit, and then drill main holes with 17.5f drill bit.
Note: Do not drill main holes with a 17.5f drill bit directly. Big drill bit might vibrate and drill out of the
marked locations.
50mm
(1.97")
(1)
50mm
(1.97")
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Make a preliminary hole, using a drill bit for small-diameter holes.
(2) Drill a main hole with a drill bit suitable for a plug bolt a little deeper than the plug bolt length.
(3) Insert the anchor bolt into the hole.
(4) Push the anchor bolt in place.
(5) Turn the bolt counterclockwise and remove.
(6) Insert the bolt correctly into the hold for equipment installation, then tighten them properly.
55
CHAPTER 3
STEP 5: Free-access floor cutting

Generally free-access construction method is applied for cable running. Cut the free-access floor using a jigsaw to lay the cables under the special stand. (Special stand is prepared by installer.)
Free-Access Construction Method
Free-access floor
Side view
Rack front
Cables
Support column
to MDF
Concrete floor
Special stand
Example of Floor Cutting
600 (1' 11.62")

or more
Rack
Rack
600 (1' 11.62")

or more
Cutting part
Wall
600 (1' 11.62")
or more
1230 (4' 0.43")

or more
Unit: mm (inch)
Note 1: Cut the free access floor in the unit of floor size.
Note 2: Footprint of the rack < Cutting part of the free-access floor = mounting base surface
56
CHAPTER 3
4. Installing SV8500 Server

This section explains the installation procedure of SV8500 server.
4.1 Unpacking
[Before unpacking]
ATTENTION
Confirm the grounding.

- Be sure to connect the 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit to grounding.
- Do not unpack the packages when grounding is not available.
Make sure to use the service kit when unpacking the package of circuit card.
During unpacking, handle the equipment carefully not to be shocked and damaged.
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
[Unpacking procedure]
START
1.
Package quantity check
Check the quantity of received packages with the packing list.
2.
Package visual check
Check the packaging for external damage.
3.
Unpack
4.
Components check
Check the name and the quantity of all the components and accessories. If anything is missing, report it to the supplier immediately.
5.
Visual check
Visually check the equipment and accessories.

- Surface deformed?
- Connectors cracked?
- Keys and lamps damaged?
- Loose wires and parts?
If any damage is found, report it to the supplier immediately.
END
57
CHAPTER 3
Make sure the following equipment and accessories are prepared:

ITEM
REMARKS
SV8500 server
Main module of Telephony Server
CF card (CF-2G-A)
CPU, EMA, EMA-SUB, EXB and IOC cards Prepare the cards depending on the system configuration.
Cables
See Section 6. Cable Connection to SV8500 Server.
SV8500 program install CD-ROM
Labeled GENERIC SOFTWARE on the CD-ROMs face.
License sheet
Manuals
BASEU
Required for DC-powered model.
4.2 Assembling SV8500 Server Module
This section explains how to assemble SV8500 server module.

4.2.1
ATTENTION
Inserting CPU Card
This section explains how to insert CPU card on SV8500 server module. See the precautions
below before handling CPU card:
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Do not touch the surface, the mounted components, and the gold-coated connectors of the card with
bare hands.
Take countermeasures against static electricity when handling CPU card (refer to Section 4. How to
Use Service Grounding Kit in INTRODUCTION).
When you want to insert a CPU card after ejecting it from powered server module, wait for a while
(about 10 seconds) to insert it into the module again.
STEP 1: Check the CPU cards inserting slot on the chassis.

STEP 2: Insert the card to the slot.
STEP 3: Fasten the screws and fix the CPU card.
STEP 4: Unfasten the screw on the front cover, and flip the cover up.
STEP 5: Insert the CF card. Close the front cover and fasten the screw.
Note:
Repeat the STEPs above for the CPU slot #1 when the second CPU card is used for dual configuration.
4.2.2
Assembling Power Module
STEP 1: Check the Power modules inserting slot on the chassis.

STEP 2: Insert the unit to the slot.
58
CHAPTER 3
STEP 3: Fasten the screws and fix the Power module. Note 1
Note 1: Screws on the right and left ends of Power module are used for SV8500 servers FG connection, so be sure
to fasten these screws tightly. If not, static electricity may cause system failure.
Note:
Repeat the STEPs above for the second Power module to configure dual power.
4.2.3
Inserting EMA, EMA SUB, EXB, and IOC Cards
This section explains how to set EMA, EMA SUB, EXB and IOC cards on SV8500 server module. See the precautions below before handling the cards:
Do not touch the surface, the mounted components, and the gold-coated connectors of the card with
bare hands.
Take countermeasures against static electricity when handling the cards (refer to Section 4. How to Use
Service Grounding Kit in INTRODUCTION).
When you want to insert a card after ejecting it from powered server module, wait for a while (about
10 seconds) to insert it into the module again.
<EMA card>
STEP 1: On the front panel, set the MB (SUB) of SW00 switch to ON.
STEP 2: Check the EMA cards inserting slot on the chassis.
STEP 3: Insert the card to the slot; put the bottom of the card aligning to the rail.
STEP 4: Fasten the screws and fix the card.
STEP 5: When EMA SUB card is used, set the MB (SUB) of SW00 switch to OFF.
<EMA SUB card>
STEP 1: Check the switch settings inside the EMA SUB-A card. Note 1
Note:
EMA SUB-B card does not need switch setting. Go on to STEP 2.
STEP 2: On the front panel of EMA card, set the MB (SUB) of SW00 switch to ON.
STEP 3: Check the EMA SUB cards inserting slot on the chassis.
STEP 5: Fasten the screws and fix the card.
STEP 6: Set the MB (SUB) of SW00 switch on EMA card to OFF.
59
CHAPTER 3
Note 1: See the table below for the switch settings on EMA SUB-A card.
SWITCH
No.
OFF
5
DIP Switch
OFF
OFF
6
7
8
STANDARD
SETTING
ON
SW10
ON
SETTING
ON
Used for external music-on-hold.
Used for internal music-on-hold.

Fixed to OFF.
Fixed to OFF.
OFF
ON
MEANINGS
Gain level setting for external music-on-hold. Note 2

*Available when SW10-1 is ON.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Internal music-on-hold setting. Note 3

*Available when SW10-1 is OFF.
ON
OFF
Note 2: To avoid over-current signal, output level of external hold tone source needs to be set from lower to higher.
Adjust the sending volume level on external hold tone source equipment by monitoring the telephone terminal connected via PSTN. When the equipment has no volume control, adjust the gain level by SW10-4
and SW10-5. Input impedance from the external hold tone source needs to be within the ranges of 8 - 50.
Make sure not to exceed this range. Depending on the external tone source, when grounding cable is not
connected between the SV8500 servers FG terminal and the external tone source equipment, there may be
the case to hear inductive noise.
SW10-4
SW10-5
Gain Level [dB]
OFF
OFF
20 dB
ON
OFF
15 dB
OFF
ON
10 dB
ON
ON
0 dB
Note 3: See the table below for internal music-on-hold setting:

SW10-6
SW10-7
SW10-8
ON
ON
ON
Not used.
ON
ON
OFF
When the Saint Go Marching In
ON
OFF
ON
Minuet
ON
OFF
OFF
Nocturne
OFF
ON
ON
Buzzer
OFF
ON
OFF
Chime
OFF
OFF
ON
Maidens Prayer
OFF
OFF
OFF
For Elise
60
Music-on-Hold Type
CHAPTER 3
<IOC card>
STEP 1: Check the switch settings inside the IOC card referring to the table in Note 4.
STEP 2: On the front panel, set the MBR key on SW00 switch to ON.
STEP 3: Check the IOC cards inserting slot on the chassis.
STEP 5: First attach the cable support bracket, and then fasten the screws to fix the card.
PW
SYS
ALM
LINK
SYS
SYS
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB
OPE
MBR
ALM
AU
) PF
T
PW
SYS
LOCK
SYS
SEL
SW
O0
1
X
SD
SW
O0
DR
RS
SW
O1
RD
INIT
PBI
SYS
ALM
LINK
SYS
SYS
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB
No.
ER
OPE
CD
MBR
ALM
CO
NN
Cable support
bracket
AU
SYS
LOCK
SYS
SEL
1
SD
SW
O0
) PF
T
SW
O0
DR
RS
RD
SW
O1
INIT
PBI
No.
ER
CD
CO
NN
Phillips screwdriver
(1) Slip the bracket in before fastening the screw.

(2) Slide the bracket rightward and hook on the screw.
(3) Fastern the screw to fix the bracket.
STEP 6: Connect SV 4PORT CA-A cable to the front panel.

STEP 7: On the front panel, set the MBR key on SW00 switch to OFF.
Note 4: See the table below for the switch settings on IOC card.
SWITCH
S2
ON
No.
DIP Switch
SETTING
STANDARD
SETTING
ON
OFF
MEANINGS
This card is inserted into IOC #1.
This card is inserted into IOC #0.

SMDR BSC Note 5
ON
OFF
SMDR free wheeling
OFF
Fixed to OFF.
OFF
Fixed to OFF.
Note 5: This setting is available when TERMINAL=4 (Terminal Kind = SMDR free wheeling) is assigned by AIOC
command.
61
CHAPTER 3
<EXB card>
STEP 1: Check the EXB cards inserting slot on the chassis.
STEP 3: First attach the cable support bracket, and then fasten the screws to fix the card.
Cable support
bracket
REAR
REAR
(1) Unfasten the screw slightly and slip the bracket in.
62
(2) Fastern the screw to fix the bracket.
CHAPTER 3
4.2.4
External Cable Specifications
This section explains the specifications for the cables connected to IOC card.
SV 4PORT CA-A cable
TYP0
TYP1
SV 4PORT CA-A
TYP2
TYP3
2000 mm
63
200 mm
CHAPTER 3
64
CHAPTER 3
65
CHAPTER 3
2400 RS-232C CA-0 cable
Connected to
SV 4PORT CA-A
Connected to PC
66
CHAPTER 3
Connected to
SV 4PORT CA-A
Connected to PC
67
CHAPTER 3
Connected to PC
Connected to modem
68
CHAPTER 3
Connected to
SV 4PORT CA-A
Connected to modem
69
CHAPTER 3
Extension cable (between SV 4PORT CA-A and 2400 RS-232C CA-0)

Note 1
Connected to
SV 4PORT CA-A
Connected to
2400 RS-232C CA-0
Note 1: This cable is dealt with a kind of installation cable. Adjust the cable length depending on the equipment
setting location. Modem connection is required for extending the cable to 15 meters or longer.
70
CHAPTER 3
D15 EXALM CA-A cable

1500mm (43 feet 2 inches)
Terminal A
TYP1
Terminal A
D15 EXALM CA-A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MJA
MJB
MNA
MNB
BELL
OR-B1
OR-R1
Y-B1
Y-R1
GR-B1
GY-B1
GY-R1
FM0P
FM0N
E
E
W-B1
OR-B2
W-R1
OR-R2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
48
49
50
71
Terminal B
FM0P
FM0N
MJA
MNA
BELL
E
E
MJB
MNB
Terminal B
(EXALM)
CHAPTER 3
MAT INT CA cable (interface for connecting MAT)
Connected to TYP0
From PA-AL09 card
(RS-232C INTERFACE)
Connected to TYP1
72
CHAPTER 3
2PORTS I/O CA cable
Fom PA-IO02-A card

(RS-232C INTERFACE)
Connected
to TYP0
Connected
to TYP1
P: Twisted pair cable
73
CHAPTER 3
4.3 Securing SV8500 Server Module on 19-Inch Rack
This section describes how to secure SV8500 server on 19-inch rack. Take notice of the following cautions during the mounting procedure:
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Considering the safety, be sure to perform the installation working with two or more
people.
Mount the modules and units on the 19-inch rack from bottom to up.
Quake-proof strength of the bracket for SV8500 server is 1.1G. Take account of the racks quake-proof
strength.
4.3.1
Securing BASEU on 19-Inch Rack
Secure the BASEU on the 19-inch rack.

* This procedure is required for DC-Powered Model of SV8500 server.
(a) When inch type of 19-inch rack is used:
Fasten the BASEU with four M5 (inch) screws; two screws to the screw holes on the left and right
bracket respectively.
BASEU Fastening Position (inch type of 19-inch rack)
19-inch rack
BASEU
screw
REAR
74
CHAPTER 3
(b) When mm type of 19-inch rack is used:

Fasten the BASEU with two M5 (mm) screws; one screw to the center screw hole on the left and right
bracket respectively.
BASEU Fastening Position (mm type of 19-inch rack)
19-inch rack
BASEU
screw
REAR
75
CHAPTER 3
4.3.2
Securing SV8500 Server on 19-Inch Rack
Secure the SV8500 server on the 19-inch rack.

STEP 1: Secure the module on the 19-inch rack.
Fasten the main module with four M5 (mm) screws; two screws for each bracket.
Screw Fastening Position
19-inch rack
SV8500 server
M5 screw
PW
R
LOA
D
ON
LINE
LINE
SPEED
PWR
LINE
SPEED
PW
R
LINE
D
ON
LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED
SYS
ALM
SYS
LOA
SYS
LINK
1
0
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB
) PFT
SYS
LOCK SYS
SEL
2
SWO
0
SWO
1
INIT
PBI
No.
LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED
2
3
LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED
FRONT
76
EM
A MA
IN
CHAPTER 3
5. Source Power Cable and Ground Cable Connection on BASEU

This section explains work items related to DC power cable connection.
As circumstances permit, use a CV cable (600V Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated PVC
Sheathed Cable) between Telephony Server and the rectifier. A CV cable is stronger than an
ordinary IV cable (600V PVC Insulated Cable) because of its thicker cover. It is suitable to
run along the free-access floor where it is difficult to protect the cable from damage. To easily
identify different cables, use cables of different colors as follows:
Note:
48 V:
Blue (White)
GND:
Red (Black)
E:
Green
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
The color shown in parentheses is applicable to the UL Specification.
CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital to the safe operation of telecommunication equipment.

Never operate telecommunication equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected.
77
CHAPTER 3
Power Cable Connection Diagram

Rectifier
BASEU
Pattern connection on
the internal board
-48
Power Receiving
terminals
DC OUT0
CV, IV (green)
FE
CV, IV (red)
+80VIN
+80V
-48VR
(COMMON)
-48VR
CV, IV (blue)
-48V
-48V
DC OUT1
Earth bar
CONN: D-sub 9-pin
Note 1
Type 1 grounding
FUSE
FE G -48
+80V
-48VR
+80
-48
BBU
FUSE3.2A
FUSE3.2A
FUSE3.2A
FUSE5.0A
+80V
FUSE5.0A
-48VR
external output
-48V OUT
to external
equipment
DC OUT2
-48V
DC OUT3
+80V
-48VR
-48V
DC OUT4
0
external output
-48VR OUT
+80V
Power Distributing terminals for SV8500 server, PIR, and TSWR
to external
equipment
-48V
-48VR
-48V
DC OUT4
+80V
-48VR
-48V
Note 1: FUSE disconnection failure is informed to PIR (AC-DC BASE connector) via D09 ST CA-A cable.
78
CHAPTER 3
5.1 Power and Grounding Cables

Telephony Server Rectifier
5.1.1
TERMINAL
CABLE
-48V
REMARKS
2
Use 14 mm (AWG 6) of branch cables allowing

for the maximum system configuration.
8.36 mm2 (AWG 8)
Rectifier
Select main power cable depending on the system configuration and the distance from rectifier
(refer to Calculating Sectional Area for Main
Power Cable).
IV (Green), CV 8.36 mm2 (AWG 8)
Earth bar
Required for lightning protection.
IV (Red), CV
FE
CONNECTED TO
Rectifier
IV (Blue), CV
-48VR
SIZE
8.36 mm2 (AWG 8)
DC Power Receiving Terminals on BASEU
+80V -48VR -48

IN (COMMON) IN
INPUT
Calculating Sectional Area for Main Power Cable

Rectifier
Battery
I2 M 2
I1 M 1
S = 0.018x(I1M1+I2M2)
V
where,
S
I1
M1
I2
M2
V
:
:
:
:
:
:
Telephony Server
Sectional area required (mm2)

Maximum current passing between battery and rectifier
Two-way cable length between battery and rectifier
Maximum current passing between rectifier and Telephony Server
Two-way cable length between rectifier and Telephony Server
Voltage drop
79
CHAPTER 3
5.1.2
Rectifier Battery, AC Power Distribution Board, and Earth Bar
TERMINAL
CABLE
SIZE
AC
VCT (2-wired)
-48V
IV (Blue), CV
GND
IV (Red), CV
FE
IV (Green), CV
IV (Green), CV
CONNECTED TO
REMARKS
AC power distribution board
Use VCT-S or VCT-SB to run along with low current cables.
Battery
Note 2
Used for AC power backup.

Required for grounding.
Earth bar
Required for lightning protection.
Note 2: Varies depending on the system configuration and the distance from Telephony Server.
5.1.3
Telephony Server MDF
TERMINAL
-48VOUT
-48VOUT
-48VROUT
2-3
0, 1
0-4
CABLE
SIZE
CONNECTED TO
IV (Blue), CV or internal cable
1.3 mm2 (AWG 16)
-48VOUT 3.2A
IV (Blue), CV or internal cable
1.3 mm (AWG 16)
IV (Red), CV or internal cable
1.3 mm2 (AWG 16)
REMARKS
MDF
-48VOUT 5.2A
-48VROUT
FUSE and External Output Terminals on BASEU
3.2 3.2 3.2 5.0 5.0

A A A A A
+80V -48VR -48

IN (COMMON) IN
INPUT
80
CHAPTER 3
5.2 Power and Grounding Cables Connection
STEP 1: Run the main power and ground cables up to DC power receiving terminals on BASEU. Use a flatblade driver to connect main power cable (AWG 8).
DC terminals
flat-blade driver slot
5.5 mm
0.7 mm
cable hole
STEP 2: Confirm the rectifiers circuit breaker (NFB) is OFF.

STEP 3: Connect power and ground cables to DC POwer terminals on BASEU.
STEP 4: Connect the power and ground cables to the rectifiers output terminals.
STEP 5: Using a continuity tester, confirm that the -48V power cable is not shorting to the G power cable or
the FE ground cable.
81
CHAPTER 3
5.3 DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamp
STEP 1: Remove the shorting piece from the +80V connector on Power Distributing Terminals, and then connect the cable provided on the +80V Power Receiving Terminals to the +80V connector.
STEP 2: Connect the power and ground cables to each terminal of the equipment.
STEP 3: Using a continuity tester, confirm that the 48V and +80V power cables are not shorting to the G
power cable or the FE ground cables.
BBU Connection
BASEU
+80V -48VR -48V
+80V -48VR -48V
+80V -48VR -48V
+80V -48VR -48V
Power
Receiving
Terminals
+80V -48VR -48V
+80V -48VR -48V
Power Distributing Terminals

External output
-48V OUT
4
-48VR OUT
0
+80V -48VR -48

IN (COMMON) IN
IV(Red), CV cable Note 2
IV(Blue), CV cable Note 2
IV, CV cable Note 2
-48VR(G)
-48V
AL1
AL2
+80V
+80VR(G)
DC-DC Converter on BBU
Note 1
Note 1: The above is an example when SN1757 BBUB is used. The marking on BBU (such as "-48V") might be dif-
ferent, depending on the type of the BBU used. Prepare a BBU per IMG.
Note 2: The cable sheath of CV cables is black color only, therefore, use the color tape to distinguish the cables.
82
CHAPTER 3
6. Cable Connection to SV8500 Server

This section explains the cable connection for SV8500 server (cable connection for PIR is not
included).
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
6.1 Power Cable Connection
Connect the power cable on the rear panel of main module.

[Power Cable Connection for AC-Powered Model]
STEP 1: Make sure the PWR switch on the rear panel of main module remains OFF.
STEP 2: Plug the AC power code into AC power inlet on the rear panel of main module.
PWR switch
Make sure the PWR
remains OFF.
REAR
AC power inlet
AC power code
(supplied with SV8500 server)
Note:
Type 1 grounding conductor (below 10 ) is required. (Be sure to use the AC power cable supplied with
SV8500 server.)
CAUTION
Do not connect the ground cable to gas barrel. It may cause fire.
83
CHAPTER 3
STEP 3: Connect the other end of AC power code to proper AC power source equipment. In this example, AC
power is supplied through the power unit accommodated on the bottom of the 19-inch rack.
PWR switch
Make sure the PWR
remains OFF.
REAR
AC power inlet
AC power code
(supplied with SV8500 server)
84
CHAPTER 3
[Power Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model]

STEP 1: Connect DC power cables between the DC terminals (-48V, -48VR, FE) on the rear panel of SV8500
server and on BASEU.
-48VR
(COMMON)
REAR
MP -48V
ALM IN
SV8500 server
-48VR
-48V
+80V
yellow
blue red
blue red green
DC terminals
green
Power installation cable
(AWG 12 or AWG 14)
BASEU
85
CHAPTER 3
STEP 2: Connect alarm cables to detect main power alarm on DC-Powered Model of power module. Detecting 0 level is considered to be an alarm.
*Perform this step if required.
MDF
Installation cable (AWG 20)
Rectifier
MPALM
external alarm
MPALM
For the rectifier equipped with dry contact, apply the following connection.
MDF
Installation cable (AWG 20)
MPALM
Dry contact
external alarm
MPALM
COM
86
CHAPTER 3
Use a flat-blade driver to connect power cables (AWG12 or AWG14) to DC terminals.

*Be careful not to see electric potential on the metallic part of the driver when connecting the power cable.
DC terminals
3.0 mm
0.4 mm
cable hole
87
CHAPTER 3
6.2 LAN Cable Connection
Connect 1000BASE-T cables to LAN1 connector (for user network connection) and LAN2 connector (for operation and administration) on the front panel of SV8500 server. LAN3 and LAN4 connectors are used for FCCS
network connection.
PW
R
LOAD
ON
LIN
E
CF
CO
NS
OLE
LIN
1
2
ON
E
SPEE
D LIN
3
3
E
SPEE
MO
DE
4
US
Connect LAN cable.
LIN
1
E
SPEE
PW
R
LOAD
D LIN
E
SPEE
ON
LIN
E
PW
R
SYS
ALM
LIN
SYS
SYS
OP
E
ALM
MB
(SU
B)
PFT
CF
CO
NS
OLE
SYS
LOCK
SYS
SEL
SW
O0
1
LAN1 connector: for user network connection

LAN2 connector: for operation and administration
LIN
1
2
ON
SPEE
D LIN
3
3
E
SPEE
MO
DE
2
US
LIN
SW
O1
E
1
E
SPEE
D LIN
E
SPEE
LAN cable
88
INIT
PBI
No.
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
INSTALLATION - PIR
1. Preparation
1.1 Equipment Location Check
(1) Environmental Requirements
Temperature: 0C~40C (32F~104F)
Humidity: below 90% (non-condensing)
Main Source Power: AC 100V/120V/230/240V (50/60 Hz) 10% , DC -48V 10%
(2) Floor Conditions

Do not place SV8500 system under any of the conditions listed below, doing so can cause operational trouble, failure, or electrical shock.
On unstable floor, unsettled and sideling board
Locations which might be wet with water, oil, and chemicals
Dusty environment
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Locations which receive strong electric wave from other equipment
Any heavy equipment is loaded on the rack
Locations with poor heat dissipation or poor ventilation
Locations with vibration
(3) Floor Space

Floor space for the system equipment, such as maintenance console (PCPro), Main Distribution Frame
(MDF), and rectifier is required in addition to the main rack mounting area.
89
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
1.2 Unpacking
[Before unpacking]
ATTENTION
Confirm the grounding.

- Be sure to connect the 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit to grounding.
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
- Do not unpack the packages when grounding is not available.
Make sure to use the service kit when unpacking the package of circuit card.
During unpacking, handle the equipment carefully not to be shocked and damaged.
[Unpacking procedure]
START
1.
Package quantity check
Check the quantity of received packages with the packing list.
2.
Package visual check
Check the packaging for external damage.
3.
Unpack
4.
Components check
Check the name and the quantity of all the components and accessories. If anything is missing, report it to the supplier immediately.
5.
Visual check
Visually check the equipment and accessories.

- Surface deformed?
- Connectors cracked?
- Keys and lamps damaged?
- Loose wires and parts?
If any damage is found, report it to the supplier immediately.
END
Make sure all the following components and accessories listed are prepared.
Note:
Prepare a Phillips screwdriver, a flat-blade screwdriver, and a box-end wrench (5 mm) for installation.
90
CHAPTER 4
1.2.1
INSTALLATION - PIR
Components and Accessories of AC-Powered Model (Component Type: 1-IMG)
PIR including AC-DC Power Unit: Required number of PIRs according to the system configuration,
maximum 4 PIRs per system
FANU (H): 1/PIR
Control circuit cards:

CIRCUIT CARD NAME
NUMBER
DC-DC PWR #0 (PA-PW55-C)
1/PIR
(1/PIR)
TSW (PH-SW10-A)
Required for DC-DC power dual configuration

Time Division Switching
2 for dual-TSW configuration
MUX (PH-PC36)
REMARKS
1/PIR1, PIR2, PIR3
Interface between TSW and line/trunk card

2/PIR1, PIR2, PIR3 for dual-TSW configuration
Cables:
NUMBER
REMARKS
AC power code for AC-DC Power Unit
1/PIR
2/PIR for AC-DC Power Unit dual configuration
Alarm cable between ACDC Power Unit and PIR
1/PIR
CABLE NAME
Internal power cable for

PIR
BUS cable between
SV8500 server and PIR0
PWR ALM CA-B

3P PWR CA-A
1/PIR
3P PWR CA-B
D37-SC50 CA-A
Alarm and music cable be- D15 ST-F CA-A

tween SV8500 server and
D15 ST-FF CA-A
PIR
Internal BUS cable for
PIR0
PIR
BUS and alarm cable between PIRs
1
1
D37-PS40 CA-A
(1)
MT24-D25 CA-A
1/PIR1, PIR2, PIR3
D25 CRS CA-A/B
1/PIR
Installation cable (25P shielded cable with CHAMP)
2 cables for SV8500 server dual configuration
PIR BUS-MUSIC CA-A
D15 ST CA-A/B
2/PIR for DC-DC power dual configuration.
Required for dual configuration

1/PIR1, PIR2, PIR3

Max. 12/PIR
91
Required for station/trunk connection from LT

connector to MDF
CHAPTER 4
1.2.2
INSTALLATION - PIR
Components and Accessories of DC-Powered Model (Built-up Type: 1-IMG)
BASEU: 1
PIR: Required number of PIRs according to the system configuration, maximum 4 PIRs per system
FANU (V): 1/IMG, mounted on the lowest PIR module on each IMG

CIRCUIT CARD NAME
NUMBER
1/PIR
(1/PIR)
TSW (PH-SW10-A)
Required for DC-DC power dual configuration

Time Division Switching
MUX (PH-PC36)
REMARKS
1/PIR1, PIR2, PIR3

Cables:
CABLE NAME
Internal power cable for
PIR
BUS cable between
SV8500 server and PIR0
3P PWR CA-A
3P PWR CA-B
D37-SC50 CA-A
Alarm and music cable be- D15 ST-F CA-A

tween SV8500 server and
D15 ST-FF CA-A
PIR
PIR0
PIR
BUS and alarm cable between PIRs
NUMBER
REMARKS
1/PIR
2/PIR for DC-DC power dual power configuration.
1
1
PIR BUS-MUSIC CA-A
D37-PS40 CA-A
(1)
MT24-D25 CA-A
1/PIR1, PIR2, PIR3
D25 CRS CA-A/B
1/PIR
D15 ST CA-A/B
Required for dual configuration

1/PIR1, PIR2, PIR3

Max. 12/PIR
92
Required for station/trunk connection from LT

connector to MDF
CHAPTER 4
1.2.3
INSTALLATION - PIR
Components and Accessories of DC-Powered Model (Built-up Type: 4-IMG)
BASEU: 1/IMG + 1 for TSWR mounted rack
TSWR: 1
PIR: Required number of PIRs according to the system configuration, maximum 16 PIRs per system
FANU (V): 1/IMG for the bottom-mounted PIR module on each rack

CIRCUIT CARD NAME
NUMBER
DC-DC PWR (PH-PW14)
2 for DC-DC power dual configuration on TSWR.

Time Division Switching on TSWR
2/IMG for dual-TSW configuration
TSW (PH-SW12)
1/IMG
DLKC (PH-PC20)
GT (PH-GT09)
PLO (PH-CK16-D)
1/PIR
(1/PIR)
MUX (PH-PC36)
REMARKS
Required for DC-DC power dual configuration on PIR.

2/PIR for dual-TSW configuration
1/PIR
Cables:
CABLE NAME
NUMBER
REMARKS
BUS cable between SV8500 server

and TSWR
D37-SC50 CA-B
BUS cable between TSWR and

PIR
D37-D25 CA-A
1/PIR
Alarm cable between SV8500

server and TSWR
D15 ST-F CA-A
Alarm cable between SV8500

D15 ST-F CA-C
server and PIR0/PIR4/PIR8/PIR12
PLO cable between TSWR and
MDF
Internal power cable for PIR
1/IMG
D37 EXCLK CA-A
3P PWR CA-A
3P PWR CA-B
1/PIR
2/PIR for DC-DC power dual power configuration.

Internal BUS cable for PIR
MT24-D25 CA-A
1/PIR
Alarm cable between PIRs
D15 ST CA-A/B
1 for 2-PIR IMG

2 for 3-PIR IMG
3 for 4-PIR IMG
Max. 12/PIR
93
2 cables for dual clock configuration.
Required for station/trunk connection from

LT connector to MDF
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
2. Mounting MDF
Install Main Distribution Frame (MDF) considering the lead-in holes for local cables, C.O.
lines, Tie lines, and cable running route. Here explains how to set rack-mounted type of MDF
as an example. Determine the required number of MDF according to the SV8500s circuit
configuration and the quantity of local lines.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
One set of MDF is required per PIR.

- 2 pieces of Terminal Block Mounting Holder per MDF
- 10 pieces of Terminal Block (250 terminals) per Mounting Holder, total 500 terminals on one MDF
Terminal Block (25 terminals)
MDF
Terminal Block Mounting Holder (2 pieces)
Note:
Three types of terminal blocks can be mounted on the MDF.
Arrester (line protector) board for C.O. lines and external lines
Test spring terminal (25P Jack board) for localization test
Local block terminal
94
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
2.1 MDF Mounting Position
MDF can be mounted on the front and rear sides of the rack.
One side mounthing
Back-to-Back mounting
PIR1
PIR0
MDF
PIR0
MDF
MDF
2.2 MDF Mounting Procedure
Install the MDF to the predetermined location on the rack.

STEP 1: Check the quantity of required accessory items, such as arresters, block terminals, etc. according to
your system configuration.
One MDF is configured with the following components:
- Cable Support (2P)
- MDF Base
- Cable Duct
- Terminal Block Mounting Holder (2P)
95
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 2: Referring the figure below, secure the MDF with screws in the order from A to D.
Cable
CABLE SUPPORT
A M4 screw2
19-inch rack
Fasten the screws from

outside to inside.
MDF Base
BM5 screw8
Terminal Block Mounting Holder

DM4 screw6
96
Cable Duct
CM5 screw5
CHAPTER 4
STEP 3: Confirm all the screws are fastened on the appropriate positions.
19-inch Rack
A M4 screw for fastening Cable Support

B M5 screw for fastening MDF Base
C M5 screw for fastening Cable Duct
D M4 screw for fastening Terminal Block Mounting Holder
97
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
2.3 Cable Termination on MDF
This section describes how to connect the cables on MDF terminal.

2.3.1
MDF Terminal
Sandwiching a streak mark panel between two terminal blocks, upper terminals are called as UP and lower
terminals as LO in this explanation.
UP terminal
streak mark panel
Back (cabling side)
LO terminal
UP terminal
streak mark panel
LO terminal
Front (jumper side)
2.3.2
Connect the cables to the back side of terminal block.
Leave blank at the front of terminal blocks for jumper connection.
MDF Terminal Connection
The wires for UP and LO terminals are connected to reverse ways.

Side view
Front view
UP
LO
Back
UP
LO
98
CHAPTER 4
(a) Cable connection to UP terminal
UP terminal
(b) Cable connection to LO terminal
LO terminal
2.3.3
Cable Connection Procedure
Local cable connection to MDF terminal is explained in the following steps.

STEP 1: Peel off the local cables cover at the outlet.
Cable outlet
99
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 2: Determine the cable length to the MDF terminal, and cast on cloth the peeled cables.
Cable outlet
STEP 3: Insert a tie-wrap to MDF terminal (both UP and LO terminals).
QCBIX 1A
UP terminal
Tie-wrap
QCBIX 1A
LO terminal
STEP 4: Run the peeled cables through the mounting holder. Fix the cables with the tie-wrap, leaving enough
length (approx. 180 mm/7 inch).
Tie-wrap
excess length (180 mm)
UP terminal
100
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 5: Attach the UP terminal to the mounting holder.

setting position of UP terminal
QCBIX 1A
STEP 6: Tie up the wires lightly confirming the wiring positions on the UP terminal, from low-numbered terminals in order.
Pay attention to the way of tie-wrap (upward)
STEP 7: Punch the Terminal Tool into the target tine of UP terminal to fix the wire and cut off the excess wire.
put the black cutting

blade downward
punch in
hold the switching button sideway
101
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 8: Invert the UP terminal and attach it onto the mounting holder.
connecting side by
using Terminal Tool
UP terminal
STEP 9: Fix the cables with the tie-wrap to LO terminal, leaving approximately 180 mm (7 inch) of excess
length.
excess length (180 mm)
LO terminal
Tie-wrap
102
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 10: Invert the LO terminal and attach it onto the mounting holder.
QCBIX 1A
setting position of LO terminal
Pay attention to the way of tie-wrap (downward)
STEP 11: Tie up the wires lightly confirming the wiring positions on the LO terminal, from low-numbered terminals in order.
Tie up the wires lightly

from down to up
103
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 12: Punch the Terminal Tool into the target tine of LO terminal to fix the wire and cut off the excess wire.
Put the black tine of Terminal Tool upward for LO terminal connection.
put the black cutting

blade upward
punch in
STEP 13: Return the inverted UP terminal and attach it to the mounting holder.
connecting side by
using Terminal Tool
UP terminal
STEP 14: After arranging the cables, attach the labeled streak mark panel to the mounting holder. Write the cable information to the label.
labeled streak mark
104
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
2.4 Test Spring Terminal and Arrester on MDF
Accommodate localization test terminals and arresters on 25P Jack board equipped with dividing parts.
2.4.1
Purpose of Use
(a) Test Spring Terminal (Localization Test Terminal)

Used in combination with local block terminals, the Test Spring Terminal can divide the communication circuit into system side and external line. Also this terminal is used to mount arrester.
(b) Arrester (Line Protector)
Protects the system and the line circuit from lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
2.4.2
Connecting Diagram
(a) Connecting Diagram of Test Spring Terminal
[ Local side ]
[ System side ]
Test Spring
Terminal
Telephony Server
MDF
MDF
LO
UP
External line (C.O. line, Tie line)
(b) Connecting Diagram of Arrester

Lightning strile, etc
Telephony Server
MDF
MDF
Arrester
LO
UP
External line (C.O. line, Tie line)
105
CHAPTER 4
2.4.3
INSTALLATION - PIR
Outline View
(a) Outer View of Test Spring Terminal

25P jack board
equipped with splitter
UP terminal (to external line)

Disconnecting plug
LO terminal (system side)
FRONT
(b) Outer View of Arrester

UP terminal (to external line)
25P jack board
equipped with splitter
Grounding Frame
LO terminal (system side)
FRONT
Arrester
2.4.4
Circuit Diagram of Arrester
Circuit diagram of arrester is shown for reference.

R1
R2
T1
L1
SPD
Ar
To external line
System side
SPD
L2
T2
R1
106
R2
CHAPTER 4
2.4.5
INSTALLATION - PIR
Connecting Arrester
Here describes the connection of arrester.
Arrester has two types of Ground Frames for UP side and LO side. Ground Frame for UP side has tab slots.
Connect the ground cable 2mm2IV to Type 1 grounding conductor (less than 10).
STEP 1: Solder the ground cables to Ground Frames.

STEP 2: Connect 25P Jack board to local block terminal.
STEP 3: Attach the 25P Jack board on the mounting holder of MDF.
Ground Frame (UP)
2mm IV (green)
Slot tab
Ground Frame (LO)
to other Ground Frame
Front view
2mm IV (green)
Connect to Type1 grounding conductor

(below 10 Ohm)
Note:
Secure Type 1 grounding (less than 10). When the system has Type 1 grounding, FE terminal connection is also accepted. Connect to ground frame for horizontal installation type of MDF.
107
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
3. Securing Modules on 19-Inch Rack

How to secure modules/units and circuit card mounting procedure are explained in this section.
3.1 AC-Powered Model of PIR (Component Type)
3.1.1
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Securing PIR
This section describes how to secure PIR modules on 19-inch rack. Take notice of the following cautions during
the mounting procedure:
Considering the safety, be sure to perform the installation working with two or more people.
Note:
AC-DC Power Unit can configure dual power, though a dummy unit is attached to the #1 (right) side of the
chassis when the product is shipped. Refer to Section 5. Mounting Second Power Unit on AC-DC Power
Unit for Dual Power Configuration for the way to mount the second power unit.
STEP 1: Check the mounting position on the rack. This figure shows an example when a 39U capacity of 19inch rack (mm-type) is used.
Mounting Position on 19-inch Rack
FANU(H)
PIR2
AC-DC Power Unit

FANU(H)
PIR1
AC-DC Power Unit

FANU(H)
PIR0
FANU(H)
Note 1
AC-DC Power Unit
SV8500 server
PIR3
AC-DC Power Unit
Note 1: The set of PIR0 (AC-DC Power Unit + PIR + FANU) needs to be mounted right above the SV8500 server
module.
108
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 2: Fix a FANU (H) on the top of each PIR. Attach a Top Cover (H), ventilating backward, on the top of
FANU.
[ TO
P (H
)]
[ FA
NU
]
P
IR
Philips
screwdriver
Note:
Keep the supplementary top covers (meshed covers); they are required when the system configuration is
changed to Built-up Type.
109
CHAPTER 4
STEP 3: Attach a bottom plate to each PIR.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Philips
screwdriver
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
[ Bo
ttom
plat
e]
110
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 4
STEP 4: Fix four brackets to AC-DC Power Unit.
111
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 5: Secure AC-DC Power Units and PIR modules (FANU is attached) on the rack with screws. Using a
Phillips screwdriver, secure the units and modules from bottom to up. Be sure to proceed this installation working by two or more people.
19-inch rack
PIR
M5 screw
00
01
02
03
Phillips
screwdriver
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
AC-DC Power Unit
FRONT
Note:
Fasten four screws also on the rear to secure AC-DC Power Unit (two screws for rear right and left brackets respectively).
112
CHAPTER 4
3.1.2
INSTALLATION - PIR
Mounting Circuit Card
This section explains how to mount circuit card in PIR. See the following precautions when handling circuit
cards:
Do not touch the surface, the mounted components, and the gold-coated connectors of circuit card with bare
hands.
Take countermeasures against static electricity when handling circuit cards (refer to Section 4. How to Use
STEP 1: Loosen the screw using a Phillips screwdriver and remove the card stopper attached on the front of
PIR. (Do not take off the screw from the PIR here.) The removed card stopper needs to be attached
again after inserting circuit cards for insuring accelerated-resistance 1.1G.
Card stopper
Pan head screw

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
FRONT
STEP 2: Wipe off the both sides of connectors on the circuit card using a soft cloth moistened with pure
trichloroethylene or methanol (medical alcohol). Make sure no lint and dust remains on the connectors.
STEP 3: Check the mounting slot of each card referring to the Module Face Layout. Check the slot number
and the color of card-puller tab.
STEP 4: Set the switches on each circuit card. See Circuit Card Manual for the switch setting of each card.
113
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 5: Insert the circuit card into the proper slot, ensuring the card is correctly aligned to the rail at the top
and bottom. (Do not fix the circuit card to the backboard connector here. Partially insert the circuit
cards about 50 mm (two inches) from the backboard connectors.) If no problem is found, insert the
circuit card to the connectors on the back plate firmly.
Circuit card stopper

Wrist strap
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Connect the ground wire

to the frame Note 1
1
FRONT
STEP 6: After all the circuit cards are inserted, fasten the card stopper.
Note 1: Without a proper frame grounding to 19-inch rack, even when a wrist strap is connected, static electricity
cannot be released and it may cause equipment failure.
114
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
3.2 DC-Powered Model of PIR (Built-up Type)

3.2.1
Securing PIR and TSWR
This section describes how to secure PIR and TSWR modules on 19-inch rack. Take notice of the following
cautions during the mounting procedure:
Considering the safety, be sure to perform the installation working with two or more people.
For two or more PIRs configuration of IMG, do not mount any equipment above the top-mounted PIR. Heat
cannot be released so system failure may occur.
STEP 1: Check the mounting positions of SV8500 server, PIR, and TSWR (for 4-IMG only) mounting location on the rack. The following figure shows an example when a 39U capacity of 19-inch rack (mmtype) is used.
Mounting Position on 19-inch Rack: 1-IMG
PIR3
Note 3
PIR2
PIR1
FANU(V)
Note 1
Note 2
PIR0
SV8500 server
BASEU
Note 1: PIR0 needs to be mounted right above the SV8500 server module.
Note 2: Install a FANU right above the bottom-mounted PIR.
Note 3: Mount all the modules closely, without unnecessary space.
115
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Mounting Position on 19-inch Rack: 4-IMG

IMG 0
IMG 1
PIR3
PIR7
IMG 2
PIR11
IMG 3
PIR15
Note 3
PIR2
PIR6
PIR10
PIR14
PIR1
PIR5
PIR9
PIR13
FANU(V)
FANU(V)
FANU(V)
FANU(V)
TSWR
Note 2
PIR0
PIR4
PIR8
PIR12
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
58UGTXGT
Note 4
BASEU
Note 5
Note 4: TSWR needs to be mounted right above the SV8500 server module.
Note 5: For 4-IMG configuration, PIRs need to be mounted in units of IMG (IMG0, IMG1, IMG2, IMG3).
STEP 2: Fix a FANU (V) on the top of the bottom-mounted PIRs on each rack. (Install a FANU (V) on PIR0,
PIR4, PIR8, and PIR12 shown in Mounting Position on 19-inch Rack: 4-IMG.)
Note:
Keep the supplementary top covers; they are required when PIR is added and the system configuration is
changed to Component Type.
116
CHAPTER 4
When only one PIR is mounted on the rack:

Attach a Top Cover (H) on the FANU.
[ TO
P (H
)]
[ FA
NU
]
P
IR
Philips
screwdriver
117
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 4
Attach a bottom plate to the PIR.
00
01
02
03
04
05
Philips
screwdriver
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
[ Bo
ttom
plat
e]
118
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
When two or more PIRs are mounted on the rack:

Install a FANU on the bottom-mounted PIR. Attach a Top Cover (V), ventilating upward, on the top of the
FANU.
[ TO
P (V
)]
[ FA
NU
P
IR
Philips
screwdriver
119
CHAPTER 4
Attach a bottom plate to the PIR.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Philips
screwdriver
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
[ Bo
ttom
plat
e]
120
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 3: Attach a mesh cover to the top-mounted PIR on each rack.

* A Top Cover (V) is attached on the bottom-mounted PIR and a mesh cover on the top-mounted PIR.
No top covers are needed for the middle-mounted PIRs.
Philips
screwdriver
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
121
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 4: Secure TSWR (for 4-IMG) and PIRs (FANU is attached) with screws on the rack. Using a Phillips
screwdriver, secure the modules from bottom to up. Be sure to proceed this installation working by
two or more people.
19-inch rack
PIR
M5 screw
00
01
02
03
04
05
Phillips
screwdriver
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
FRONT
122
CHAPTER 4
3.2.2
INSTALLATION - PIR
Mounting Circuit Card
This section explains how to mount circuit card in PIR. See the following precautions when handling circuit
cards:
Do not touch the surface, the mounted components, and the gold-coated connectors of circuit card with bare
hands.
Take countermeasures against static electricity when handling circuit cards (refer to Section 4. How to Use
STEP 1: Loosen the screw using a Phillips screwdriver and remove the card stopper attached on the front of
PIR. (Do not take off the screw from the PIR here.) The removed card stopper needs to be attached
again after inserting circuit cards for insuring accelerated-resistance 1.1G.
Card stopper
Pan head screw

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
FRONT
STEP 2: Wipe off the both sides of connectors on the circuit card using a soft cloth moistened with pure
trichloroethylene or methanol (medical alcohol). Make sure no lint and dust remains on the connectors.
STEP 3: Check the mounting slot of each card referring to the Module Face Layout. Check the slot number
and the color of card-puller tab.
STEP 4: Set the switches on each circuit card. See Circuit Card Manual for the switch setting of each card.
123
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 5: Insert the circuit card into the proper slot, ensuring the card is correctly aligned to the rail at the top
and bottom. (Do not fix the circuit card to the backboard connector here. Partially insert the circuit
cards about 50 mm (two inches) from the backboard connectors.) If no problem is found, insert the
circuit card to the connectors on the back plate firmly.
Circuit card stopper

Wrist strap
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Connect the ground wire

to the frame Note 1
FRONT
STEP 6: After all the circuit cards are inserted, fasten the card stopper.
Note 1: Without a proper frame grounding to 19-inch rack, even when a wrist strap is connected, static electricity
cannot be released and it may cause equipment failure.
124
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
4. Cable Connection
This section explains how to connect installation cable, power cable, and bus cable on PIR.
ATTENTION
4.1 Backboard on PIR and TSWR
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Check the connector locations on the backboard referring to the following figures.
Connectors on PIR Backboard

LT 11 / PL 0

LT 3

LT 7

LT 6
LT 10

LT 2

-48V 1
-48V 0

LT 1

LT 9
LT 5

LBUS 1
LT 8

LT 4

LBUS 0
125

LT 0

126
MUX 021
MUX 011
MUX 001
DO NOT CONNECT
DO NOT CONNECT
MUX 020
MUX 010
MUX 000
DO NOT CONNECT connectors (in red dotted box) cannot be used.

DO NOT CONNECT
DO NOT CONNECT
BUS 1
06
DO NOT CONNECT
BUS 0
07
DO NOT CONNECT
MUX 003
08
MUX 002
MUX 013
09
MUX 012
MUX 023
10
MUX 022
MUX 033
MUX 103
MUX 113
11
MUX 032
MUX 102
MUX 112
MUX 123
12
MUX 031
MUX 111
MUX 110
MUX 122
MUX 133
13
MUX 030
MUX 121
MUX 120
MUX 132
EXCLK 0
EXCLK 1
14
MUX 101
MUX 131
MUX 130
DO NOT CONNECT
DO NOT CONNECT
15
MUX 100
DO NOT CONNECT
DO NOT CONNECT
DO NOT CONNECT
DO NOT CONNECT
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Connectors on TSWR Backboard (for DC-Powered Mode: 4-IMG)
05
04
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
4.2 Installation Cable Connection
Here describes how to connect installation cable (25P Shielded Cable with CHAMP) from
LT connector on the backboard to MDF. MDF is required to connect stations and trunk lines.
STEP 1: Remove the rear cover from the PIR. Loosen the screws, and slide the cover to remove.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Rear cover
[R
EA
R]
Just loosen the screws.

Do not take them off from the cover.
127
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 2: Check the location of LT connectors on the PIR backboard. The figure below shows the correspondence of LT connector with the circuit card mounting slot.
PIR Backboard
LT 7
LT 3
LT 10
LT 6
LT 2
LT 9
LT 5
LT 1
LT 8
LT 4
LT 0
LT 11 / PLO (Note 1)
LT 11 / PLO (Note 1)
LT 4
PIR Slot Accommodation
LT 10
LT 5
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
TSW / MUX
14 18 22
TSW / MUX
DC-DC PWR #1
DC-DC PWR #0
15 19 23
Slot Number
15 19
14 18
Logical Groups
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 17 21
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 17
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 16 20
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 16
LT 2
LT 0
LT 1
LT 8
LT 6
LT 3
LT 7
128
LT 9
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Note 1: When PLO function of TSW card is set to enabled, clock signal is brought in via LT11/PLO connector. The
figure below shows the connector lead of LT11/PLO.
STEP 3: Connect the CHAMP to the appropriate LT connector.

STEP 4: Secure the installation cable to the Cable Support Assembly on the back bottom of each PIR.
Put the cables from PIR module together on the Cable Support Assembly with clamps, and then connect to MDF for outside routing.
Cable Support Assembly
Installation cables
[R
EA
R]
129
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
(1) Peel off the cable cover approximately 18 mm (0.7 inch) adapting to the tie-up position
of the Cable Support Assembly for frame grounding. This is also required for using
shield cables as local cables between MDF and IDF.
Approx. 18 mm (0.7 inch)
Shielded cable
(2) Fold up the clamp.

Clamp
(3) Wind the clamp around the cables.
130
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
(4) Tie up the clamped cable to Cable Support Assembly.
Cable Support Assembly
M4 screw
Cable Support
Assembly
Clamp
Installation cable
131
Cable
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
4.3 Internal and Inter-Frame Cable Connection
This section explains the power, alarm, and BUS cable connection for PIRs. According to
the PIR model and the system configuration, connect the required cables referring to the following sections.
4.3.1
Power Cable Connection (common to all the models of PIRs)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Connect the power cable between DC-DC PWR card and DC terminals. This cable is connected from -48V0
connector on DC terminals of PIRs backboard. When DC-DC DPWR card is used for dual power configuration,
connect the power cable from -48V1 connector to DPWR card. This connection is common to all the PIRs.
Power Cable Connection to DC-DC PWR Card
<Single DC-DC PWR configuration>
<Dual DC-DC PWR configuration>

PIR Front
PIR Front
Slot Number
01 03
DC-DC
DC-DC
-48V IN
connector
DC-DC
-48V IN
connector
Slot Number
01
connected to -48V0 connector

of DC terminals on the rear
Note:
connected to -48V0 and -48V1

connectors on DC terminals on
the rear
Run the cables from front to back through the cable duct at the bottom of each PIR to protect the cables.
Cable Duct
PIR Side View
Front connector
Circuit Card
REAR
Cable Duct
Connector on rear panel
cable
132
CHAPTER 4
4.3.2
INSTALLATION - PIR
Power Cable and Bus Cable Connection for AC-Powered Model
Connect the cables according to the module configuration.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
FANU
FANU
PIR 2
PIR 2
AC-DC
AC-DC
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 1
PIR 1
PIR 1
AC-DC
AC-DC
AC-DC
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
FANU
AC-DC
AC-DC
AC-DC
AC-DC
PIR 3
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
AC-DC
1-PIR configuration
2-PIR configuration
3-PIR configuration
Note:
4-PIR configuration
Be sure to mount the set of PIR0 right above the SV8500 server module.
STEP 1: Connect power, ground, and FG cables (-48V, -48VR, and FG) between PIR and AC-DC Power Unit
on the rear panel.
133
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
When Message Waiting Lamp is used:
REAR
#07
+4
DC terminals
DC terminals
connected to +80V
on PIR1 ~ PIR3
-48VR
-48V +80V
FG, -48VR, -48V connectors
-48VR
FG
-48V -48Vaux
AC-DC Power Unit
Note 3
Note 2
INPUT
FG
-48VR(G)
-48V
AL1
OUTPUT
AL2
+80V
+80VR(G)
DC-DC Converter on BBU Note 1
134
+80V (OUT)
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Note 1: The figure above is an example when SN1757 BBUB is used. The marking on a BBU (such as "-48V") might
be different, depending on the type of the BBU used.

Note 2: Use the followings:
- Installation cable: AWG 16

- Crimping terminal: R1.25-3
Note 3: Use the followings:

- Crimping terminal: R5.5-5
or
- Crimping terminal: R2-5
When Message Waiting Lamp is not used:
REAR
#07
+4
DC terminals
DC terminals
-48VR
-48V +80V
FG, -48VR, -48V connectors
-48VR
FG
-48V -48Vaux
AC-DC Power Unit
Note 3
135
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR

DC terminals
3.0 mm
0.4 mm
cable hole
136
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 2: Connect BUS cables between SV8500 server and PIR0, between PIR and AC-DC Power Unit, and
between PIRs (TSW cable, alarm cable). Dotted lines in the figure mean the cables for #1 circuit in
dual configuration.
BUS Cable Connection for AC-Powered Model of PIR (1/2)
FRONT
REAR
To PIRALMA
on PIR3
FANU
13 14
[9]
PIRALMB
PIR 2
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
AC/DC BASE
MUX11
MUX01
AC-DC Power Unit
ALM OUT
FANU
[8]
13 14
[1]
PIRALMB
PIR 1
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
AC/DC BASE
MUX11
[8]
MUX01
AC-DC Power Unit
ALM OUT
[1]
[2]
FANU
[9]
13 14
MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
PIR 0
[5]
[4]
PIRALMA
LBUS0
[1]
MUSIC
BUS1
BUS0
AC-DC Power Unit
[7]
MUX11
MUX01
[8]
AC/DC BASE
MUX12 MUX13
MUX02 MUX03
ALM OUT
IMG0 MUSIC
SV8500 server
PIRALMB
LBUS1
EXALM
To MDF
[2]
[3]
137
PIR
EXB #1
PIR
EXB #0
[10]
[6]
To MUX03,
MUX13
on PIR3
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
BUS Cable Connection for AC-Powered Model of PIR (2/2)
FRONT
REAR
FANU
To PIRALMB
on PIR2
13 14
MUX #1
MUX #0
PIRALMB
PIR 3
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
AC/DC BASE
MUX11
MUX01
AC-DC Power Unit
[9]
[8]
ALM OUT
[1]
[2]
138
To MUX03/MUX13
on PIR0
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
BUS Cables for AC-Powered Model of PIR

FROM
NO.
UNIT/MODULE
TO
CONNECTOR
UNIT/
CONNECTOR NAME
NAME
MODULE
MUX01
PIR0 (rear)
MUX11
MUX02
PIR0 (rear)
MUX12
MUX03
PIR0 (rear)
MUX13
PIR0
(front)
PIR0
(front)
PIR0
(front)
[1]
MUX01
PIR1 (rear)
MUX11
MUX02
PIR2 (rear)
MUX12
MUX03
PIR3 (rear)
MUX13
PIR0 (rear)
[2]
PIR0 (rear)
PIR0 (rear)
[3]
[4]
SV8500 server
(EXB-PIR card #0)
SV8500 server
(EXB-PIR card #1)
PIR0
MUX01
MUX11
MUX02
MUX12
MUX03
MUX13
PIR1
(front)
PIR2
(front)
PIR3
(front)
PIR1
PIR2
PIR3
CABLE NAME
MUX1 (Slot 13
PH-SW10-A connector)
Required when PIR1 is

mounted.
MUX1 (Slot 14
MUX2 (Slot 13

mounted.
MUX2 (Slot 14
MUX3 (Slot 13
MUX3 (Slot 14
MUX (Slot 13 PH-PC36
front connector)

mounted.
MT24-D25 CA
Note 4, Note 5
mounted.

front connector)
front connector)

mounted.

front connector)
front connector)

mounted.

front connector)
MUX01

mounted.
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
REMARKS
D25 CRS CA-A/B
MUX01

mounted.
mounted.
MUX11
BUS0
PIR
PIR0
D37-SC50 CA-A
BUS1
BUS0
MUSIC
PIR0
LBUS0
PIR BUS-MUSIC CA-A
Note 5
D37 PS40 CA-A
[5]
PIR0
BUS1
PIR0
LBUS1
[6]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
IMG0
PIR0
PIRALMA
D15 ST-F CA-A
[7]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
MUSIC
PIR0
MUSIC
D15 ST-FF CA-A
139
Note 5
Required for dual configuration.
FROM
NO.
[8]
[9]
AC-DC Power Unit
ALM OUT
PIR
AC/DC BASE
PIR0
PIRALMB
PIR1
PIRALMA
PIR1
PIRALMB
PIR2
PIRALMA
PIR2
PIRALMB
PIR3
PIRALMA
SV8500 server
[10]
(EMA SUB-A card)
INSTALLATION - PIR
CABLE NAME
REMARKS
TO
CONNECTOR
UNIT/
CONNECTOR NAME
NAME
MODULE
UNIT/MODULE
CHAPTER 4
EXALM
MDF
PWR ALM CA-B
Connect to each PIR

mounted.
D15 ST CA-A/B

mounted.
mounted.
D15F EXALM CA-A
Required for Alarm Indicating Panel and external music-on-hold

connection.
Note 4: Run the cables (such as BUS cables between the front connectors on TSW/MUX card and the MUX0x/1x
connectors on backboard) from front to back through the cable duct at the bottom of each PIR to protect
the cables.
FRONT
SIDE
slot number
13 14
MUX
MUX
#0
#1
FRONT
MUX card
REAR
MUX
connector
Front cable
Connect the cables
through the cable duct
Connector on
rear panel
Note 5: Refer to Section 4.3.5 How to Fix Connectors on PIR for Connecting BUS Cable for the way to connect the
cables to junction panel on rear PIR.

STEP 3: Connect AC power code.
Take note the following precautions for power supply and protective grounding.
Use a three-pole AC power code.
According to the system configuration, connect the AC power code to the power supply that can supply
enough power to SV8500 server and PIRs.
Connect all the AC power codes from SV8500 server and AC-DC Power Units to one AC tap, for securing
protective common grounding.
140
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Extract Type1 grounding (below 10) for the AC tap.
AC tap or power supply unit connected to power distribution board needs to be prepared by the user.
(1) First plug the AC power code to SV8500 server. (Refer to Cable Connection in Chapter 3.)
(2) Plug the AC power code to AC power inlet on the rear panel of AC-DC Power Unit.
REAR
[ FA
NU
}
[P
IR
]
AC inlet (#0)
[ AC
-DC
Po
we
rU
n
it ]
AC inlet (#1)
AC power code
(supplied with AC-DC Power Unit)
(3) Connect the other end of the AC power code to proper AC power supply.
141
CHAPTER 4
4.3.3
INSTALLATION - PIR
Power Cable and Bus Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model (1-IMG)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
PIR 3
Note 1
PIR 2
PIR 2
PIR 1
PIR 1
PIR 1
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
PIR 0
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
2-PIR configuration
3-PIR configuration
1-PIR configuration
Note 2
Note 1: Be sure to mount a FANU right above the PIR0 module.
Note 2: Be sure to mount PIR1-PIR3 modules above the FANU.
142
4-PIR configuration
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 1: Connect power, ground, and FG cables (-48V, G, FE) between PIR and BASEU.
*See Section 5.3 DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamp in Chapter 3 for the cable connection
with BBU to use Message Waiting Lamp.
REAR
-48VR
-48V +80V
DC terminals
PIR1
blue red
green
FANU
PIR0
-48VR
-48V +80V
DC terminals
blue red
green
BASEU
to other PIRs
143
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR

DC terminals
3.0 mm
0.4 mm
cable hole
144
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 2: Connect BUS cables between SV8500 server and PIR0, between PIRs (TSW cable, alarm cable).
Dotted lines in the figure mean the cables for #1 circuit in dual configuration.
BUS Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model of PIR (1-IMG)
FRONT
REAR
13 14
[1]
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
PIR 3
[9]
MUX11
MUX01
13 14
[2]
[1]
PIRALMB
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
PIR 2
MUX11
MUX01
13 14
[9]
PIRALMB
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
PIR 1
MUX11
MUX01
[1]
[2]
FANU
13 14
MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
PIR 0
[5]
[4]
PIRALMB
LBUS1
PIRALMA
LBUS0
AC/DC BASE
[7]
MUSIC
BUS1
BUS0
IMG0
MUSIC
MUX11
MUX12
MUX13
MUX01
MUX02
MUX03
EXALM
To MDF
[6]
SV8500 server
[3]
BASEU
PIR
EXB #1
PIR
EXB #0
[10]
FUSE
145
[8]
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
BUS Cables for DC-Powered Model of PIR (1-IMG)

FROM
NO.
UNIT/MODULE
TO
CONNECTOR
NAME
UNIT/
MODULE
MUX01
PIR0 (rear)
PIR0 (front)
MUX1 (Slot 14
PH-SW10 connector)
MUX02
MUX2 (Slot 13
PH-SW10 connector)
PIR0 (front)
MUX12
MUX2 (Slot 14
PH-SW10 connector)
MUX03
MUX3 (Slot 13
PH-SW10 connector)
PIR0 (rear)
PIR0 (front)
MUX13
MUX3 (Slot 14
PH-SW10 connector)
MUX01
MUX (Slot 13 PHPC36 front connector)
[1]
PIR1 (rear)
PIR1 (front)
MUX11
MUX02
PIR2 (rear)
PIR2 (front)
MUX12
MUX03
PIR3 (rear)
PIR3 (front)
MUX13
[2]
PIR0 (rear)
PIR0 (rear)
[3]
[4]
SV8500 server
(EXB PIR card #0)
SV8500 server
(EXB PIR card #1)
PIR0
MUX01
MUX11
MUX02
MUX12
MUX03
MUX13
PIR1
PIR2
PIR3
CABLE NAME
MUX1 (Slot 13
PH-SW10 connector)
MUX11
PIR0 (rear)
PIR0 (rear)
CONNECTOR
NAME
Required when
PIR1 is mounted.
Required when
PIR2 is mounted.
Required when
PIR3 is mounted.
MT24-D25 CA
Note 3, Note 4
Required when
PIR1 is mounted.
Required when
PIR2 is mounted.
Required when
PIR3 is mounted.

MUX01
Required when
PIR1 is mounted.
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
REMARKS
D25 CRS CA-A/B
MUX01
Required when
PIR2 is mounted.
Required when
PIR3 is mounted.
MUX11
BUS0
PIR
PIR0
D37 SC50 CA-A

BUS1
BUS0
MUSIC
PIR0
LBUS0
PIR BUS-MUSIC CA-A
Note 4
D37-PS40 CA-A
[5]
PIR0
BUS1
PIR0
LBUS1
[6]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
IMG0
PIR0
PIRALMA
D15 ST-F CA-A
[7]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
MUSIC
PIR0
MUSIC
D15 ST-FF CA-A
146
Note 4
Required for dual

configuration.
CHAPTER 4
FROM
NO.
[8]
[9]
[10]
TO
UNIT/MODULE
CONNECTOR
NAME
UNIT/
MODULE
CONNECTOR
NAME
CABLE NAME
BASEU
FUSE
PIR0
AC/DC BASE
D09 ST CA-A
PIR0
PIRALMB
PIR1
PIRALMA
PIR1
PIRALMB
PIR2
PIRALMA
PIR2
PIRALMB
PIR3
PIRALMA
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
INSTALLATION - PIR
EXALM
MDF
REMARKS
Required when
PIR1 is mounted.
D15 ST CA-A/B
Required when
PIR2 is mounted.
Required when
PIR3 is mounted.
D15F EXALM CA-A
Required for
Alarm Indicating
Panel and external
music-on-hold
connection.
the cables.
FRONT
SIDE
slot number
13 14
MUX
MUX
#0
#1
FRONT
MUX card
REAR
MUX
connector
Front cable
Connect the cables
Connector on
rear panel
147
CHAPTER 4
4.3.4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Power Cable and Bus Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model (4-IMG)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
PIR 3
PIR 7
PIR 11
PIR 15
PIR 2
PIR 6
PIR 10
PIR 14
PIR 1
PIR 5
PIR 9
PIR 13
TSWR
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
SV8500
server
PIR 0
PIR 4
PIR 8
PIR 12
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
PIR8 ~ PIR11
(IMG 2)
PIR12 ~ PIR15
(IMG 3)
BASEU
TSW
PIR0 ~ PIR3
(IMG 0)
PIR4 ~ PIR7
(IMG 1)
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1: Be sure to mount a FANU right above the bottom-mounted PIR in each rack.
Note 2: For 4-IMG configuration, PIRs need to be mounted in units of IMG. Be sure to mount the second PIR right
above the FANU in each IMG. Mount all the modules closely, without unnecessary space.
148
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 1: Connect power, ground, and FG cables (-48V, G, FE) between TSWR/PIR and BASEU.
*See Section 5.3 DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamp in Chapter 3 for the cable connection
with BBU to use Message Waiting Lamp.
Power Cable Connection between TSWR and BASEU
REAR
-48VR
-48V +80V
DC terminals
TSWR
blue red
-48VR
-48V +80V
DC terminals
blue red
green
BASEU
149
green
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Power Cable Connection between PIR and BASEU
REAR
-48VR
-48V +80V
DC terminals
PIR1
blue red
green
FANU
to other PIRs
-48VR
PIR0
-48V +80V
DC terminals
blue red
green
BASEU
150
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR

DC terminals
3.0 mm
0.4 mm
cable hole
151
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 2: Connect the BUS cables between SV8500 server and PIR0, between PIRs (TSW cable, alarm cable).
Dotted lines in the figure mean the cables for #1 circuit in dual configuration.
BUS Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model of PIR (4-IMG): TSWR
REAR
[1]
[5]
BUS 0
BUS 1
05 04
EXCLK0
EXCLK1
15 14
Connected to MDF
TSWR
TSWRALMA
BASE
[2]
[4]
Connected to MDF
EXALM
TSWR
SV8500 server
EXB-TSWR #1 TSWR
[3]
EXB-TSWR #0 TSWR
BASEU
FUSE
BUS Cables for DC-Powered Model of PIR (4-IMG): TSWR

FROM
NO.
TO
CABLE NAME
UNIT/MODULE
CONNECTOR
NAME
UNIT/
MODULE
CONNECTOR
NAME
SV8500 server
(EXB-TSWR card #0)
TSWR
TSWR
BUS 0
SV8500 server
(EXB-TSWR card #1)
TSWR
TSWR
BUS 1
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-B card)
TSWR
TSWR
TSWRALMA
D15 ST-F CA-A
[3]
BASEU
FUSE
TSWR
BASE
D09 ST CA-A
[4]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
EXALM
[1]
[2]
D37 SC50 CA-B
MDF
Note 3
[5]
TSWR
EXCLK0
EXCLK1
MDF
REMARKS
Required for dual-TSW

configuration.
Required for Alarm IndicatD15F EXALM CA-A ing Panel and external music-on-hold connection.
D37 EXCLK CA-A
Required for synchronizing

system clock by PLO card.
Note 3: Connecting this cable to any wrong connectors by mistake could damage EMA SUB card. Make sure the
target is the right connector before connecting the cable.
152
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
BUS Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model of PIR (4-IMG): PIR Internal (common to all IMGs)
FRONT
REAR
13 14
MUX #1
MUX #0
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
PIR 3/7/11/15
MUX11
MUX01
13 14
MUX #1
MUX #0
PIRALMB
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
PIR 2/6/10/14
[1]
MUX11
MUX01
13 14
MUX #1
MUX #0
PIRALMB
PIRALMA
MUX
MUX
PIR 1/5/9/13
[3]
MUX11
MUX01
FANU
13 14
[1]
MUX #1
MUX #0
PIRALMB
PIR 0/4/8/12
MUX
MUX
AC/DC BASE
MUX11
MUX01
BASEU
FUSE
IMG 0/1/2/3
[2]
153
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
BUS Cables for DC-Powered Model of PIR (4-IMG): TSWR

FROM
NO.
UNIT/
MODULE
PIR0/4/8/12
(rear)
PIR1/5/9/13
(rear)
TO
CONNECTOR
NAME
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
[1]
PIR2/6/10/14
(rear)
PIR3/7/11/15
(rear)
[2]
[3]
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
UNIT/
MODULE
PIR0/4/8/12
(front)
PIR1/5/9/13
(front)
CONNECTOR NAME
CABLE NAME

front connector)
Required when PIR0/4/

8/12 is mounted.

front connector)
front connector)
front connector)

front connector)
PIR2/6/10/14
(front)
front connector)

9/13 is mounted.
MT24-D25 CA
Note 4, Note 5
10/14 is mounted.

front connector)
PIR3/7/11/15
(front)
front connector)
BASEU
FUSE
PIR0/4/8/12
BASE
PIR0/4/8/12
PIRALMB
PIR1/5/9/13
PIRALMA
PIR1/5/9/13
PIRALMB
PIR2/6/10/14
PIRALMA
PIR2/6/10/14
PIRALMB
PIR3/7/11/15
PIRALMA
REMARKS

11/15 is mounted.
D09 ST CA-A
D15 ST CA-A
Connect as required according to module configuration.
the cables.
FRONT
SIDE
slot number
13 14
MUX
MUX
#0
#1
FRONT
MUX card
REAR
MUX
connector
Front cable
Connect the cables
Connector on
rear panel
154
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
BUS Cable Connection for DC-Powered Model of PIR (4-IMG): TSWR - IMG0
FRONT
REAR
PIR3
[1]
MUX11
MUX01
PIR2
MUX11
MUX01
06
MUX 103 MUX 102 MUX 101 MUX 100
MUX 003 MUX 002 MUX 001 MUX 000
TSWR
10
PIR1
MUX11
MUX01
[1]
PIR0
IMG 0
PIRALMA
SV8500 server
MUX11
MUX01
BASEU
[2]
TSWR
IMG0
155
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
BUS Cables for DC-Powered Model of PIR (4-IMG): TSWR - IMG0

FROM
NO.
UNIT/MODULE
TSWR
TSWR
[1]
TSWR
TSWR
[2]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
TO
CONNECTOR
NAME
MUX000 (Slot 06)

MUX100 (Slot 10)
MUX001 (Slot 06)
MUX101 (Slot 10)
MUX002 (Slot 06)
MUX102 (Slot 10)
MUX003 (Slot 06)
MUX103 (Slot 10)
IMG0
UNIT/
MODULE
PIR0
PIR1
PIR2
PIR3
PIR0
156
CONNECTOR
NAME
CABLE NAME
REMARKS
MUX01
For TSW #0
MUX11
For TSW #1
MUX01
For TSW #0
MUX11
MUX01
D37-D25 CA-A
For TSW #1
For TSW #0
MUX11
For TSW #1
MUX01
For TSW #0
MUX11
For TSW #1
PIRALMA
D15 ST-F CA-C
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
FRONT
REAR
PIR7
[1]
MUX11
MUX01
PIR6
MUX11
MUX01
07
MUX 113 MUX 112 MUX 111 MUX 110
MUX 013 MUX 012 MUX 011 MUX 010
TSWR
11
PIR5
MUX11
MUX01
[1]
PIR4
IMG 1
PIRALMA
SV8500 server
MUX11
MUX01
BASEU
[2]
TSWR
IMG1
157
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR

FROM
NO.
UNIT/MODULE
TSWR
TSWR
[1]
TSWR
TSWR
[2]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
TO
CONNECTOR
NAME
MUX010 (Slot 07)
MUX110 (Slot 11)
MUX011 (Slot 07)
MUX111 (Slot 11)
MUX012 (Slot 07)
MUX112 (Slot 11)
MUX013 (Slot 07)
MUX113 (Slot 11)
IMG0
UNIT/
MODULE
PIR4
PIR5
PIR6
PIR7
PIR4
CONNECTOR CABLE NAME

NAME
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
PIRALMA
158
D37-D25 CA-A
REMARKS
Required when
PIR4 is mounted.
For TSW #0
Required when
PIR5 is mounted.
For TSW #0
Required when
PIR6 is mounted.
For TSW #0
Required when
PIR7 is mounted.
For TSW #0
For TSW #1
For TSW #1
For TSW #1
For TSW #1
D15 ST-F CA-C Required to connect IMG1.
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
FRONT
REAR
PIR11
[1]
MUX11
MUX01
PIR10
MUX11
MUX01
08
MUX 123 MUX 122 MUX 121 MUX 120
MUX 023 MUX 022 MUX 021 MUX 020
TSWR
12
PIR9
MUX11
MUX01
[1]
PIR8
IMG 2
PIRALMA
SV8500 server
MUX11
MUX01
BASEU
[2]
TSWR
IMG2
159
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR

FROM
NO.
UNIT/MODULE
TSWR
TSWR
[1]
TSWR
TSWR
[2]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
TO
CONNECTOR
NAME
MUX020 (Slot 08)
MUX120 (Slot 12)
MUX021 (Slot 08)
MUX121 (Slot 12)
MUX022 (Slot 08)
MUX122 (Slot 12)
MUX023 (Slot 08)
MUX123 (Slot 12)
IMG2
UNIT/
MODULE
PIR8
PIR9
PIR10
PIR11
PIR8
CONNECTOR
NAME
CABLE
NAME
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
PIRALMA
160
D37-D25 CA-A
REMARKS
Required when
PIR8 is mounted.
For TSW #0
Required when
PIR9 is mounted.
For TSW #0
For TSW #1
For TSW #1
For TSW #0
Required when
PIR10 is mounted. For TSW #1
For TSW #0
Required when
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
FRONT
REAR
PIR15
[1]
MUX11
MUX01
PIR14
MUX11
MUX01
13
09
MUX 133 MUX 132 MUX 131 MUX 130
MUX 033 MUX 032 MUX 031 MUX 030
PIR13
TSWR
MUX11
MUX01
PIR12
[1]
IMG 3
PIRALMA
SV8500 server
MUX11
MUX01
BASEU
[2]
TSWR
IMG3
161
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR

FROM
NO.
UNIT/MODULE
TSWR
TSWR
[1]
TSWR
TSWR
[2]
SV8500 server
(EMA SUB-A card)
CONNECTOR
NAME
MUX030 (Slot 09)
MUX130 (Slot 13)
MUX031 (Slot 09)
MUX131 (Slot 13)
MUX032 (Slot 09)
MUX132 (Slot 13)
MUX033 (Slot 09)
MUX133 (Slot 13)
IMG3
TO
UNIT/
CONNECTOR CABLE NAME
MODULE
NAME
PIR12
PIR13
PIR14
PIR15
PIR12
MUX01
For TSW #0
Required when
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
MUX01
MUX11
PIRALMA
162
REMARKS
D37-D25 CA-A
For TSW #0
Required when
For TSW #0
Required when
For TSW #0
Required when
CHAPTER 4
4.3.5
INSTALLATION - PIR
How to Fix Connectors on PIR for Connecting BUS Cable
[1] Connectors Label

See the indicating label for the connector position on the rear bottom of PIR.
Lab
PIR
el
MUSIC
BUS1
MUX11
MUX12
MUX13
BUS0
REAR
MUX01
MUX02
BOTTOM
163
MUX03
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
[2] How to Fix BUS Connectors

Note:
Perform this cable connection before mounting the module on 19-inch rack, preventing from damaging the
equipment by falling screws.
STEP 1: Detach the BUS connectors blank plate attached on the rear bottom of PIR.
STEP 2: Keep the unfastened hexagon head screws. Note 1
Note 1: Unfastened screws are used for connecting MUX cable connector.
Box-end wrench (5 mm)
STEP 1
Hexagon head screw

Blank plate
PIR
STEP 2
REAR
BOTTOM
Label
STEP 3: Push in the BWB side connector of PIR BUS-MUSIC CA-A cable to PIR.
164
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 4: Fasten two outside connectors with the supplied hexagon head screws.
STEP 4
Hexagon head screws

(supplied with the equipment)
Connectors (outside)
PIR BUS-MUSIC CA-A
Connector (BWB side)
STEP 3
STEP 5: Push in the BWB side connector of D37-PS40 CA-A cable to PIR. *This step is required for dual
configuration.
165
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
STEP 6: Fasten the outside connector with the unfastened screws in STEP 1.
Unfastened hexagon head screws
STEP 6
D37-PS40 CA-A
Connector (BWB side)
Connector (outside)
STEP 5
[3] How to Fix MUX Connectors

How to fix MUX11 connector is explained in the following steps. Connect other MUX connectors in the same
way.
STEP 1: Detach the MUX connectors blank plate attached on the rear bottom of PIR.
STEP 2: Keep the unfastened hexagon head screws. Note 2
166
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
Note 2: Unfastened screws are used for connecting MUX connector in STEP 4.
Box-end wrench (5 mm)

STEP 1
Blank plate for
MUX connector
STEP 2
STEP 3: Push in the inside connector of MT24-D25 CA-A cable to PIR.

STEP 4: Fasten the outside connector with the unfastened screws in STEP 1.
Screws unfasted in STEP 1.

STEP 4
/6&%##
Connector (inside)
Connector (outside)
STEP 3
STEP 5: Fix other MUX connectors in the same way.
167
CHAPTER 4
4.3.6
INSTALLATION - PIR
PLO Cable Connection
Connect PLO cable according to the PIR configuration.
PLO connection for AC-Powered Model and DC-Powered Model (1-IMG)

LT11/PLO connector on the rear panel of PIR0 is used for the connector lead to PLO.
Refer to PH-SW10-A (TSW) card in Circuit Card Description for the detailed explanation on LT connector lead accommodation.
REAR
LT cable
FANU
Connected to MDF
LT11 / PLO
PIR 0
SV8500 server
BASEU
168
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
CHAPTER 4
PLO connection for DC-Powered Mode (4-IMG)

EXCLK0/1 connector on the rear panel of TSWR is used for the connector lead to PLO. Refer to PH-CK16
(PLO) card in Circuit Card Description for the detailed explanation on LT connector lead accommodation.
REAR
Connected to MDF
EXCLK 0
D37 EXCLK CA-A
EXCLK 1
INSTALLATION - PIR
TSWR
SV8500 server
BASEU
169
CHAPTER 4
4.3.7
INSTALLATION - PIR
MUSIC Cable Connection
This section explains the cable connection to use external/internal music-on-hold feature.
MUSIC connection for AC-Powered Model and DC-Powered Model (1-IMG)

Connect the MUSIC connectors between EMA SUB-A card and PIR0. Use the EXALM
connector on EMA SUB-A card to bring in external music-on-hold source.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Refer to External Music-on-Hold in Peripheral Equipment Description for the connector lead of D15F
EXALM CA-A cable.
REAR
FANU
PIR 0
D15 ST-FF CA-A
D15F EXALM CA-A
MUSIC
EMA SUB-A card
MUSIC
EXALM
SV8500 server
BASEU
170
Connected to MDF
CHAPTER 4
MUSIC connection for DC-Powered Model (4-IMG)

EXCLK connector on the back plate of TSWR is used for bringing in external music-on-hold source. Refer
to PH-CK16 (PLO) card in Circuit Card Description for the detailed explanation on LT connector lead accommodation.
REAR
Connected to MDF
EXCLK 0
D37 EXCLK CA-A
EXCLK 1
INSTALLATION - PIR
TSWR
SV8500 server
BASEU
171
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
5. Mounting Second Power Unit on AC-DC Power Unit for Dual Power Configuration
This section explains how to mount dual power unit on AC-DC Power Unit.
5.1 Precautions
AC-DC Power Unit is in single power configuration in factory default. Therefore, a blank unit is
mounted on the #1 side of the AC-DC Power Unit when shipped. There are two types of blank units:
unit with two LOCK keys and unit with one LOCK key.
Replacements should be processed one power unit at a time. Do not cut off power for both AC-DC
power units at the same time.
Replace the AC-DC power unit once every seven years.

Single Power Configuration (when the product is shipped)
Blank Unit with Two LOCK Keys
Power Switch
AC-DC power unit #0
Blank unit
LOCK key
Blank Unit with One LOCK Key

Power Switch
AC-DC power unit #0
Blank unit
LOCK key
Dual Power Configuration

Power Switch
AC-DC power unit #0 AC-DC power unit #1
LOCK key
172
CHAPTER 4
INSTALLATION - PIR
5.2 Procedure
STEP 1: Unlock the blank unit.

Slide the LOCK key up
to unlock the unit.
LOCK key for blank unit
STEP 2: Remove the blank unit.

Blank Unit with Two LOCK Keys
.1%-
.1%-
.1%-
.1%-
Blank Unit with One LOCK Key
Front View
STEP 3: Slide in the new AC/DC power unit. Check that the OPE lamp light is ON and the FAN is turning.
STEP 4: Slide the LOCK key downward to lock the unit.
STEP 5: Turn the power switch ON for the newly installed #1 side of AC/DC power unit.
173
CHAPTER 4
174
INSTALLATION - PIR
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
SYSTEM STARTUP
This chapter describes how to start up the system.

1. Preparing License File
1.1 Preparation
Check the License Sheet to see all the ordered items are listed.
* License Sheet may consist of two or more sheets.
Hardware keycode of SV8500 server is required when software authentication has already been done.
Contact the license registration site and get instructions to migrate to SV8500 system reusing the former systems unnecessary license.
1.2 Download License File
The following steps show the procedure to download license file (hereinafter called SVI file).
STEP 1: Access NEC Registration Server to register the license keycode listed on the License Sheet (Note 1).
STEP 2: Follow the directions on the display and download required SVI file to any local directory.
*Be sure not to put other files in the folder the SVI file is saved.
For more information on license registration, refer to the manuals on the registration site.
Note 1: - Ordered license can be divided into multiple license files for using the license on two or more Telephony
Servers. One license software is divided into two by one process. License key code of the original license
turns unavailable and divided License Sheet (PDF file) is sent to the installer by E-mail.
- Some type of license software cannot be divided into multiple license files. Refer to the remarks on Li-
cense Sheet to see the ordered license type.

Note:
- Software keycode entry is necessary when the ordered software includes install CD (GENERAL SOFT-
WARE).
- Whether to use middleware is supposed to be checked in downloading process. So be sure to check the
middleware use on the actual SV8500 server beforehand. If any difference is found, downloaded SVI file
cannot work. When software authentication has been completed on the system, middleware check has
already been done. Check to see no difference is found between the check result and the actual middleware usage on the system.
1.3 Import SVI File
This section explains how to import the downloaded SVI file to use it under PCPro Tools administration.
STEP 1: Launch PCPro Tools, select [Tool] - [Install Data Registration Setting] on the menu bar.
STEP 2: On Install Data Registration list, select the install data to which the SVI file is to be added. Click [Detail] button.
175
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
* When no install data is displayed on the list, click [Add] button to create a new install data.
* On importing the SVI file in the procedure of Initial Startup, select the install data name registered
when Install CD is imported.
STEP 3: Select [License] in the drop-down list of data type, and click [Import] button.
STEP 4: Click [Browse] button to select the folder where the SVI file is to be stored. Enter an install data name
and then click [Import] button.
* When the same install data name is entered, existing file is to be overwritten.
STEP 5: Check the install data name entered in STEP 4 is displayed on the list.
1.4 Upload License Data to SV8500 Server
To write license data to SV8500 server for the first time, refer to Section 2. Initial Startup.
STEP 1: On PCPro Tools, select [System Control]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection Account
Name] and click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Read LM/DM ACT Side (A/D,
B/C)] and then click [Execute] button. Check the operation drive on the processing window.
STEP 2: On the main menu of PCPro Tools, select [License] and click [Execute] button. Change other parameters (System Side, Drive) if required.
STEP 3: Select [Upload] on the operation menu, and specify the install data registration name and the license
assigned in Section 1.3 Import SVI File.
STEP 4: Click [Execute] button to start uploading the SVI file.
1.5 Activate Uploaded License Data
To enable the uploaded license data, follow the STEPs below.

Note:
Note that the procedure differs depending on the license software type.
(a) System License, Client License

STEP :
Note:
On PCPro, run CFCS command and select [SVI Load and Checksum verify]. Click [Execute] button
to execute SVI file loading and checksum verification.
- When Redundant Data Memory Backup for Programs is in service, on the menu bar [Option] [Drive
Select], specify the drive (A/D) where the license software is added.
- In the case of loading or checksum verification failure, check the downloaded SVI file and go back to
Section 1.3 Import SVI File again.

(b) System Capacity License, System Optional License, Client Optional License
STEP :
On PCPro, run SINZ command and execute [Program Load & Office Data Load & System Initialize].
Select the target drive from the menu bar [Option] [Drive Select] to specify the drive where new
program is written.
176
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
1.6 Operation Check
Referring to Chapter 6 INSTALLATION TEST, check to see the applying connection is available.
1.7 Work after License Install
STEP 1: Read out the software key code and the hardware key code by AACT command, and then register
them to the registration site to get activation code.
* For the detailed explanation on getting activation code, refer to the manuals on the registration
site.
STEP 2: Register the activation code to SV8500 server.
Note:
When wrong activation code is entered by mistake, run AACT command again to enter correct activation
code.
177
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
2. Initial Startup
This section explains the initial startup procedure; program installing to CF card and IP address setting.
2.1 Preparation
Do not connect SV8500 server to the network with the default IP address.
Install PCPro Tools and PCPro application on a maintenance PC in advance.
Assign the maintenance PCs IP address enable to access the default virtual IP address (192.168.0.2)
of LAN1 connector.
Referring to Section 1. Preparing License File, download required SVI file beforehand.
2.2 Program Install to CF Card
To start up SV8500, first install the system program to CF card. Follow the steps for the program writing procedure.
Program Install for Single Configuration
Program Install for Dual Configuration
2.2.1
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Program Install for Single Configuration
STEP 1: Insert the CF card (Note 1) into CF slot on CPU card.

Note 1: Only the CF card provided by NEC is available. Refer to Section 4.1 Unpacking in Chapter 3 for the prod-
uct name.
STEP 2: Connect an Ether cable between LAN1 connector on CPU card #0 and a maintenance PC, remaining
other LAN connectors (LAN2, LAN3, and LAN4 on CPU #0) unconnected.
STEP 3: Power on the SV8500 server. ON LINE lamp on the front panel of CPU card flashes fast.
178
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
STEP 4: Launch PCPro Tools on the maintenance PC, and then set the SV8500s install CD GENERIC
SOFTWARE in the disk drive.
disk drive
STEP 5: On PCPro Tools, select [Tool] - [Import Install CD] on the menu bar. Enter an Install Data Name (optional), specify the disk drive of STEP 4, and click [Execute] button. Initial data in the CD is to be
stored on the maintenance PC.
*Do not eject the CD during importing the install data file.
STEP 6: Referring to Section 1. Preparing License File, import the downloaded SVI file as a preparation.
STEP 7: On PCPro Tools, select [Initial Install]. Place a checkmark for Use default IP address and click [Execute] button. On [Install Data Registration Name], specify the Install Data Name assigned in STEP
5, select the saved name on importing the SVI file for license, and then click [Execute] button.
STEP 8: After completing data writing, place a checkmark for Use default IP address, select [System Control] on the PCPro Tools menu, and then click [Execute] button. Select [System Shutdown] on Select
Processing dialog, and then click [Execute] button.
STEP 9: SV8500 server is shut down. Check the ON LINE lamp on the front panel of CPU card goes out. Turn
off the power of SV8500 server.
STEP 10: Connect Ether cables to LAN1/LAN2 connectors, and power on SV8500 server. Check the ON LINE
lamp on the front panel of CPU card flashes fast and then switches to flash slowly (Note 2).
Note 2: It takes about five minutes.
STEP 11: Set the maintenance PCs IP address enable to access the default virtual IP address (172.16.253.0) of
LAN2 connector. Execute ping command to check the access.
STEP 12: Launch PCPro and login to the default virtual IP address of LAN2 connector (172.16.253.0). Assign
ASYD SYS1 INDEX58 bit0=0. Change LAN1s IP address (ACT side) and subnet mask by ADTM
command. PCPro is disconnected after the IP address change.
STEP 13: Launch PCPro again and login to 172.16.253.0. Change LAN2s IP address and subnet mask by
ADTM command. PCPro is disconnected after the IP address change.
STEP 14: Set the maintenance PCs IP address enable to access the IP address assigned by ADTM command.
Login to SV8500 server and execute ping command to LAN1/LAN2 connector respectively to check
the IP address is set.
STEP 15: Assign basic configuration data referring to Section 6. System Configuration Data Assignment.
179
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
STEP 16: Assign office data referring to Section 5. Initial Data Assignment.
STEP 17: Setup the SP part of the system. Assign SIP server ID (StaticInfo.txt: SipSrvID) (Note 3) by ASPC
command.
Note 3: Unique SIP server ID must be assigned in the network.
*For more details on the registration procedure, refer to the manuals on the registration site.
*When wrong activation code is entered by mistake, run AACT command again to enter correct activation code.
STEP 20: Backup the office data using MEM_HDD command or PCProTools.
STEP 21: Referring to Section 2.1 System Initialization Test in Chapter 6, perform system initialization to test
the system operation.
STEP 22: ON LINE lamp lights when the setup is completed.
2.2.2
Program Install for Dual Configuration
STEP 1: Insert CF cards (Note 4) into CF slot on both #0 and #1 of CPU cards.
Note 4: Only the CF card provided by NEC is available. Refer to Section 4.1 Unpacking in Chapter 3 for the prod-
uct name.
PW
R
LOAD
ON
LIN
E
CO
NS
OLE
CF
LIN
E
SPE
1
2
ON
ED
1
3
LIN
E
SPE
ED
MO
DE
2
US
B
LIN
PW
R
3
E
SPE
PW
R
LOAD
ED
LIN
EXP
ED
RE
ON
LIN
E
CO
NS
OLE
SYS
ALM
LIN
SYS
SYS
OP
E
ALM
SPE
SS
CF
MB
(SU
B)
GE
AR
PFT
SYS
LOC SYS
K
SEL
2
SW
O0
1
1
2
ON
1
3
SW
O1
LIN
E
SPE
ED
INIT
PBI
No.
LIN
E
SPE
ED
MO
DE
2
US
B
EM
AM
AIN
LIN
E
SPE
ED
EXP
LIN
E
RE
SPE
ED
SS
GE
AR
STEP 3: Power on the SV8500 server. ON LINE lamps on the front panel of CPU card #0 and #1 flash fast.
180
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
STEP 4: Launch PCPro Tools on the maintenance PC, and then set the SV8500s install CD GENERIC
SOFTWARE in the disk drive.
disk drive
stored on the maintenance PC.
*Do not eject the CD during importing the install data file.
STEP 6: Referring to Section 1. Preparing License File, import the downloaded SVI file as a preparation.
STEP 9: SV8500 server is shut down. Check the ON LINE lamps on the front panel of CPU cards go out.
STEP 13: SV8500 server is shut down. Check the ON LINE lamps on the front panel of CPU cards go out.
STEP 14: Connect Ether cables to LAN1/LAN2 connectors of both #0 and #1, and turn on SV8500 server.
Check the ON LINE lamps on the front panel of #0 and #1 CPU card flash fast and then switch to
flash slowly (Note 5).
Note 5: It takes about five minutes.
STEP 15: Set the maintenance PCs IP address enable to access the default virtual IP address (172.16.253.0) of
LAN2 connector. Execute ping command to check the access.
181
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
STEP 16: Launch PCPro and login to the default virtual IP address of LAN2 connector (172.16.253.0). Assign
ASYD SYS1 INDEX58 bit0=1. Change LAN1s IP address (ACT side, #0, #1) and subnet mask by
ADTM command. PCPro is disconnected after the IP address change.
STEP 17: Launch PCPro again and login to 172.16.253.0. Change LAN2s IP address (ACT side, #0, #1) and
subnet mask by ADTM command. PCPro is disconnected after the IP address change.
STEP 18: Set the maintenance PCs IP address enable to access the IP address assigned by ADTM command.
Login to SV8500 server and execute ping command to LAN1/LAN2 connectors of #0 and #1 to
check the IP address is set.
STEP 19: Assign basic configuration data referring to Section 6. System Configuration Data Assignment.
STEP 20: Assign office data referring to Section 5. Initial Data Assignment.
STEP 21: Setup the SP part of the system. Assign SIP server ID (StaticInfo.txt: SipSrvID) (Note 6) by ASPC
command.
Note 6: Unique SIP server ID must be assigned in the network.
*For more details on the registration procedure, refer to the manuals on the registration site.
*When wrong activation code is entered by mistake, run AACT command again to enter correct activation code.
STEP 24: Backup the office data using MEM_HDD command or PCProTools.
STEP 25: Referring to Section 2.1 System Initialization Test in Chapter 6, perform system initialization to test
the system operation.
STEP 26: ON LINE lamp lights when the setup is completed.
182
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
3. Power-ON Test
Perform the power-on test before starting up the system to check the system can receive power supply and work normally.
ATTENTION
CAUTION: -Follow the procedures below when alarm lamp lights and unusual smell, smoke,
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
etc. is found:
(1) Power OFF the system.
(2) Diagnose the cause of failure.
(3) Do not power on the system until the cause is cleared and the failure is recovered.
-Make sure that all the circuit cards are disconnected before starting the power-on test.
START
Perform a visual inspection.
Check whether any pins on the backplane of each module are

bent and caused a short.
Check whether any foreign matter, such as a cleaning fluid residue, is left on the circuit cards connectors.
Check whether any ROM pins, on each circuit card equipped
with ROM (CPU, etc.), is bent or improperly seated.
Leave all of the circuit cards inserted

half-way.
Mount all of the circuit cards in the PIR, leaving them inserted
only half-way (not inserted into their connectors).
Check the input voltage.
Check the insulation across DC -48V and G terminals on DC

power receiving terminals.
Turn ON the power to the rectifier and check the voltage and its
polarity.
Check the power supplies.
Individually check the PWR card(s) on each module.

1. Turn OFF the circuit breaker on the PWR card.
2. Insert the PWR card to the backplane connector.
3. Turn ON circuit breaker ON.
4. Check the lamps light green.
5. Observe the PWR card(s) for a while and confirm that
nothing abnormal (unusual smell, smoke, etc.) occurs.
6. Turn ON/OFF the circuit breaker several times and observe
the condition.
7. Turn OFF the PWR card and pull the card about 50 mm (2
inches) frontward to disconnect the PWR card from the
backplane connectors (partial insertion).
183
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
A
Turn ON all the PWR cards.
1. Turn OFF all the PWR cards and then insert the cards to the
position.
2. Turn ON the circuit breakers.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications (unusual smell,
smoke, alarm, etc.).
Insert and check all of the line/trunk

circuit cards
Insert line (16LC, etc.) and trunk (16COT, etc.) circuit cards into
the backplane connectors individually and confirm that no fuses
are blown.
1. Set the MB switch UP and insert the circuit card.
2. Set the MB switch DOWN.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications.
4. Set the MB switch UP and then remove the circuit card.
Turn OFF the system.
See System Power ON/OFF Procedure on page 186.
END
184
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
4. Power ON/OFF Procedure

Be sure to follow the procedures below to power on/off the system.
4.1 Power ON/OFF Procedure for Telephony Server
[System Power ON]
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
1-IMG configuration
PWR/DPWR card on PIR Power module on SV8500 server
4-IMG configuration
PWR card on TSWR PWR/DPWR card on PIR Power module on SV8500 server
Note:
To turn on the PIR modules, power on the younger number of PIR module first and then turn on the older
numbers in order (PIR0 PIR1 PIR2 .....).
[System Power OFF]
1-IMG configuration
Power module on SV8500 server PWR/DPWR card on PIR
4-IMG configuration
Power module on SV8500 server PWR card on TSWR PWR/DPWR card on PIR
Note:
To turn off the PIR modules, power off the younger number of PIR module first and then turn off the older
numbers in order (PIR0 PIR1 PIR2 .....).
185
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
System Power ON/OFF Procedure
Power On Procedure
AC-Powered Model:
1-IMG
DC-Powered Model:
1-IMG
DC-Powered Model:
4-IMG
FANU
PIR 2
PIR 3
AC-DC
FANU
PIR 2
PIR 3
PIR 7
PIR 11
PIR 15
PIR 2
PIR 6
PIR 10
PIR 14
PIR 1
PIR 5
PIR 9
PIR 13
TSWR
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
SV8500
server
BASEU
PIR 0
PIR 4
PIR 8
PIR 12
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
IMG 0
IMG 1
IMG 2
IMG 3
PIR 1
PIR 1
AC-DC
FANU
ON
ON
FANU
PIR 0
FANU
PIR 0
AC-DC
SV8500
server
PIR 3
SV8500
server
BASEU
AC-DC
ON
Power OFF Procedure

AC-Powered Model:
1-IMG
DC-Powered Model:
1-IMG
DC-Powered Model:
4-IMG
FANU
PIR 2
PIR 3
AC-DC
FANU
PIR 2
PIR 3
PIR 7
PIR 11
PIR 15
PIR 2
PIR 6
PIR 10
PIR 14
PIR 1
PIR 5
PIR 9
PIR 13
TSWR
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
SV8500
server
BASEU
PIR 0
PIR 4
PIR 8
PIR 12
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
IMG 0
IMG 1
IMG 2
IMG 3
PIR 1
PIR 1
AC-DC
FANU
OFF
FANU
PIR 0
FANU
PIR 0
AC-DC
SV8500
server
PIR 3
SV8500
server
BASEU
AC-DC
OFF
OFF
186
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
4.2 SV8500 Server Power ON/OFF Procedure
[AC-Powered Model of SV8500 Server]

ATTENTION
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on Power module (on the rear panel of
SV8500 server module).
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
STEP 2: Turn on the PWR switch (to left) (Note 1). PWR lamp (on the left of Power switch) lights green.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: On PCPro Tools menu [System Control], select [System Shutdown] and click the Execute button.
SV8500 server stops operating here. Note 2
STEP 2: Turn off the Power switch (to right) on the Power module.
STEP 3: Disconnect the AC power code.
[DC-Powered Model of SV8500 Server]
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable between BASEU and SV8500 server is connected, BASEU starts supplying the power to SV8500 server here.
STEP 2: Turn on the Power switch (to left) on the Power module (on the rear panel of SV8500 server module)
(Note 1). PWR lamp (on the left of Power switch) lights green.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: On PCPro Tools menu [System Control], select [System Shutdown] and click the Execute button.
SV8500 server stops operating here. Note 2
STEP 2: Turn off the Power switch (to right) on the Power module.
STEP 3: Stop supplying the power to BASEU.
Note 1: When you want to turn on SV8500 server right after turning off the powered system, wait for a while (about
10 seconds) before powering on the system again.

Note 2: - For dual configuration, turn off the system in the order of CPU #0 #1.
- Be sure to check the PWR lamp on the front panel of CPU card turns off. When the system is in dual configuration, check the PWR lamp goes off on both #0 and #1 CPU cards.
187
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
4.3 PIR Power ON/OFF Procedure
[Turn ON/OFF Procedure: AC-Powered Model of PIR]

ATTENTION
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on AC-DC Power Unit. AC-DC Power
Unit is powered on here (OPE lamp lights and fans start turning).
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
STEP 2: Turn on the PWR switch (to right) on the front right of AC-DC Power Unit. AC-DC Power Unit starts
supplying the power to PIR here.
STEP 3: Flip the -48V SW switch up on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
STEP 2: Turn off the PWR switch (to left) on the front right of AC-DC Power Unit.
STEP 3: Disconnect the AC power code.
[Turn ON/OFF Procedure: DC-Powered Model of PIR]
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable connection between BASEU and PIR is completed, BASEU starts supplying the power to PIR here.
STEP 2: Flip -48V SW switch up on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
188
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
4.4 TSWR Power ON/OFF Procedure
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable between BASEU and TSWR
is connected, BASEU starts supplying the power to TSWR here.
STEP 2: Flip -48V SW switch up on the DC-DC power (PWR/DPWR) card.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the DC-DC power (PWR/DPWR) card.
189
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
5. Initial Data Assignment

This section explains the initial data to be set on SV8500 server by PCPro. Assign the following data according
to the connected station types. Refer to Command Manual for the detailed explanation on each command.
(a) Initial Data Assignment for Using IP Terminal and SIP Multiple Line Terminal
(b) Initial Data Assignment for Using WLAN Handset (MH Series) and Standard SIP Terminal
Note:
- Both (a) and (b) data assignment is required for dual-CPU configuration.
- Both (a) and (b) data assignment is required to support IP terminal/SIP Multiple Line terminal and
WLAN Handset (MH Series)/Standard SIP terminal in the network.

- To change the ToS value in the direction of the devices/terminals in SIP mode from SP, [3], [7], and [8]
commands in Section 5.2 Initial Data Assignment for Using WLAN Handset (MH Series) and Standard
SIP Terminal are required to be set. When [7] and [8] commands have already been assigned, however,
these commands are not necessary to be reassigned.
- Before starting initial data assignment, clear the SIP server ID (StaticInfo.txt: SipSrvID) of system #0
and #1 by ASPC command. Reassign the SIP server ID after completing initial data assignment.
5.1 Initial Data Assignment for Using IP Terminal and SIP Multiple Line Terminal
No.
COMMAND
[1]
ASYDL
Assign system data (LDM).

SYS 1, INDEX 880, b3 = 1 (Internal PHE is valid)
SYS 1, INDEX 885, b7 = 1 (Signaling Protocol (SP) is valid)
ALIDL
Assign LAN information data.

Internal PHE Accommodation data
LENS: Specify an even-numbered Group for Internal PHE using virtual PIR or existing PIR.
Virtual PIR Group No. 24 through 31 cannot be used.
TYPE: Internal PHE
REGMAX: Registration capacity [1-6144 (default = 256)] Note 1
MPH Accommodation data
LENS: Specify an even-numbered of MPH accommodation location in virtual PIR or existing PIR. Virtual PIR Group No. 24 through 31 cannot be used.
TYPE: MPH
MPH-ID: MPH identification number. Assign 1 for CPU #0 and 2 for CPU #1 (fixed). *Do
not assign any other value.
PH Kind: PHD
Use this PH: Place a check mark and specify the following parameters.
LENS: PH accommodation location [5 digits (MG/U/G)] Note 2
REGMAX: Registration capacity for SP-PHD [1-4095] Note 3
MGC PORT: Control port for TP [1-65535 (default=64102)] Note 4
TERM PORT: Control port for IP terminals/devices [1-65535 (default=60090)] Note 4
[2]
DATA ASSIGNMENT
Note 1: A maximum of 4608 ports can be assigned on virtual PIR.

Note 2: This LENS data cannot duplicate the LENS for Internal PHE.
190
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
Note 3: - To decrease the assigned REGMAX value, first delete the data and assign new value.
- When SP-PHD and SP-PHI are both accommodated on a Telephony Server, PHI also needs to be assigned for PH Kind parameter. REGMAX can have the maximum capacity of each PH, regardless of the
total number of registration capacity.
Note 4: An identical port number cannot be assigned to MGC PORT and TERM PORT.
No.
[3]
COMMAND
DATA ASSIGNMENT
ASDIL/
ASDIN
Note 5
Assign SIP domain name index data.

SIP Server ID: Display only (SIP server ID assigned by ASSDL/ASSDN is displayed).
Domain Name: Any domain name, such as dummy.com, is accepted.
ASSDL/
ASSDN
Note 5
Assign SIP server operating data.

FPC: Enter the Fusion Point Code allocated to the SV8500 server (1-253). (*ASSDN only)
SIP Server ID: Allocate a unique SIP Server ID within the range of 1-127. Note that this ID is
assigned by ASPC command when starting up the system.
<BASE DATA tab>
[4]
CHANNEL: Assign the number of speech channels between TP and SP (3 - 1200). Enter the minimum value
3.
NAME: Enter the SPs hostname assigned for SP as the SIP server name (Max. 16 characters) for identifying
the SP.
TN: Tenant Number (1 - 63)
LENS: Accommodated location of SIP server to virtual speech channels. Vacant LENS is hunted automatically. Note 6
e.g.
MG:
START=2
END=3
UNIT:
START=1
END=3
GROUP:
START=0
END=23
LEVEL:
START=0
END=4
<BASE tab>
DETAIL: Not required to set.
<DOMAIN tab> Select the domain name assigned by ASDIL/ASDIN.
EDIT DOMAIN: Select the domain name to be added.
DOMAIN LIST: All the domains allowed to connect are listed.
<PRESENCE SERVER tab>
DETAIL: Not required to set.
<REDUNDANCY tab> Assign the SIP server ID of mate-SIP server. [S-154] SIP Wireless Terminals Backup
feature enables SP redundancy configuration by setting the same virtual IP address to two SPs (SP#0 and SP#1).
For details, refer to [S-154] SIP Wireless Terminal Backup in Data Programming Manual - Business.
Pair SIP Server ID: Assign SIP Server ID of the redundant partner SP (1-127). Note 7
Note 5: This ASDIL/ASDIN and ASSDL/ASSDN setting is required when SIP Multiple Line terminals are used,
without using other types of SIP stations in the system.

Note 6: Specify the virtual speech channels (physical PIR or virtual PIR) having no station/trunk data. It is not
available to overwrite the existing station/trunk data.

Note 7: This parameter must be assigned for dual configuration of SV8500 server. SR-MGC starts rescuing the net-
work only when #0 and #1 of CPU cards are both down.
191
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
Note:
Changed data is notified to SP. In the case of SP down or depending on the network state, SP cannot receive
the information, so data discrepancy might occur. SP requires rebooting. Related message is output to
PCPro.
Note:
Use COSSL/COSSN command when you want to check the SPs operating state and the channel settings.
5.2 Initial Data Assignment for Using WLAN Handset (MH Series) and Standard SIP Terminal
No.
COMMAND
DATA ASSIGNMENT
REMARKS
ASYDL
Assign system data (LDM).

SYS 1, INDEX 513 (LDM usage)
SYS 1, INDEX 514 (NDM usage)
SYS 1, INDEX 880, b3 = 1 (Internal PHE is valid)
ASYD
Assign system data.

SYS 1, INDEX 30 = 06 Hex (Mounting capacity of DM)
SYS 1, INDEX 186, b6 = 1 (CCIS is in service) Note 1
SYS 1, INDEX 220, b6 = 0 (ISDN in service) Note 1
SYS 1, INDEX 420, b0 = 1 (Access code operation by
preset dialing from a PS is available)
[3]
ALOCL
Assign ToS value for the interface between TP and SP.

Network Address: Enter 0.0.0.0 Note 2
LOC-ID: 0 is automatically set.
Place a check mark to Signal Packet check box, and assign
the ToS value for SP. Default: IP Precedence, Precedence = 6
The assigned ToS value is set for the

messages in the direction of TP
SP, SP TP, and SP SIP terminals. Messages from SIP terminals
to SP is not included.
[4]
ADTM
If required, change the Internal PHEs default port number.
Not required to assign when the default port number 60130 is used.
Four ports of registration area is required per three speech channels between TP and SP.
[1]
[2]
[5]
ALIDL
Assign Internal PHEs accommodated location.

LENS: Specify the accommodated location (five digits)
TYPE: Internal PHE
REGMAX: Registration capacity [1-6144] (default=256)
[6]
ADPM
Initialize the assigned Internal PH.

PH Type: Internal PHE
Menu: Module Initialize
Note 1: System data for CCIS and ISDN need to be assigned, though optional software for CCIS/ISDN is not re-
quired when these network connection is not used.

Note 2: Be sure to initialize Internal PHE by ADPM command when the network address is changed.
192
CHAPTER 5
No.
[7]
COMMAND
SYSTEM STARTUP
DATA ASSIGNMENT
ASDIL/
ASDIN
Assign SIP domain name index data. Register all the domain names handled by Telephony
Server. Up to 1020 domains can be registered per system. Note 3
SIP Server ID: Display only (SIP server ID assigned by ASSDL/ASSDN is displayed).
Domain Name: domain name of WLAN Handset stations [Max 128 characters (alphanumerics,
. (dot), - (hyphen)) e.g. SIP1.tokyo.com, SIP2.tokyo.com]
ASSDL/
ASSDN
Assign SIP server operating data.

FPC: Enter the Fusion Point Code allocated to the SV8500 server (1-253). (*ASSDN only)
SIP Server ID: Allocate a unique SIP Server ID within the range of 1-127. Note that this ID is
assigned by ASPC command when starting up the system.
<BASE DATA tab>

CHANNEL: Assign the number of speech channels between TP and SP (3-1200). Note 4, Note 5
NAME: Enter the SPs hostname assigned for SP as the SIP server name (Max. 16 characters) for identifying
the SP. Refer to ASPC command.
TN: Tenant Number (1 - 63)
LENS: Accommodated location of SIP server to virtual speech channels. Note 6
<BASE tab>
[8]
DETAIL: Assigns detailed data related to SIP. Place a checkmark for each check box if required.
The terminal authentication per call is omitted: Default is OFF (This setting blocks connections attempted by
unauthorized terminal.)
Change in SIP Server port number: Port number of SP, used for changing the default port number (=5060).
*Restart SV8500 server after changing SPs port number.
<DOMAIN tab> Assign the domain names to be managed by a specified SP. Select target domain name(s) assigned by ASDIL/ASDIN on the list. An SP can manage multiple domains, though a domain cannot be managed
by multiple SPs.
EDIT DOMAIN: Select the domain name to be added.
DOMAIN LIST: All the domains allowed to connect are listed.
<PRESENCE SERVER tab> Assign SIP Presence Server data when SIP Presence Server is used in other SIPbased subnet to cooperate with SV8500. When no presence server is used, data assignment is not required.
IP Address: IP address of the presence server
Port Number: Port number used by the presence server
<REDUNDANCY tab> Assign the SIP server ID of mate-SIP server. [S-154] SIP Wireless Terminals Backup
feature enables SP redundancy configuration by setting the same virtual IP address to two SPs (SP#0 and SP#1).
For details, refer to [S-154] SIP Wireless Terminal Backup in Data Programming Manual - Business.
Pair SIP Server ID: Assign SIP Server ID of the redundant partner SP (1-127). Note 7
Note 3: SIP URI format is used to specify own and destination SIP terminals. SIP URI is represented in a "Station-
Number@domain" format. See the following examples.

(a) When a single domain name is used in the system:
All the SIP terminals in the network use the same domain name (easier to manage).
Example: StationNumber@SIPSERVER-Hostname.co.jp
193
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
(b) When multiple domain names are used in the system:

Different domain names are assigned for each department (domain can be managed on a work group
basis):
Example: StationNumber@xxx.yyy.zzz.co.jp, StationNumber@vvv.yyy.zzz.co.jp
Note 4: Be sure to assign virtual speech channels to the continuous four groups of vacant LENS.
When PHC data have already been assigned, check the assigned virtual speech channels before registering
CHANNEL. A series of 4-group virtual channels needs to be assigned for PHC by ATRK command.
Note 5: Enter any multiples of three for CHANNEL. The minimum available value is 3. (For example, if 4 or 5 is
entered, 6 is automatically set.)

Up to 402 speech channels* can be assigned per 2-MG**. When more than 402 channels are to be assigned, first assign 402 to CHANNEL parameter. Then, specify another MG and enter the required number
of channels. Click the Change button to execute (refer to [Example for setting maximum virtual speech
channels]).
When the data is changed while the system is in operation, SP needs rebooting. Once SP is rebooted, new
calls cannot be made/terminated until the REGISTER message is sent from SIP terminal and registered to
SP. Be sure to reset all the SIP terminals by turning the power OFF and ON.
* When [S-154] SIP Wireless Terminal Backup is in service, up to 804 speech channels can be assigned
per 2-MG. UP to 402 speech channels per 2-IMG for one SIP server ID.
** 2-MG (two module groups) means a set of MGs; MG00-MG01, MG02-MG03, MG04-MG04, and
MG05-MG06 are applied.
Note 6: Specify the virtual speech channels (physical PIR or virtual PIR) having no station/trunk data. It is not
available to overwrite the existing station/trunk data.

Note 7: This parameter must be assigned for dual configuration of SV8500 server. SR-MGC starts rescuing the net-
work only when #0 and #1 of CPU cards are both down.

Note:
Changed data is notified to SP. In the case of SP down or depending on the network state, SP cannot receive
the information, so data discrepancy might occur. SP requires rebooting. Related message is output to
PCPro.
Note:
Use COSSL/COSSN command when you want to check the SPs operating state and the channel settings.
[Example for setting maximum virtual speech channels]

The following example shows how to assign 1200 channels of virtual speech channel:
STEP 1: To assign up to 402 channels:
CHANNEL: 402
LENS: Accommodated location of SIP server
MG: Module Group (START=2, END=3)
UNIT: Unit (START=1, END=3)
GROUP: Group (START=0, END=23)
LEVEL: Level (START=0, END=4)
194
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP

CHANNEL: 804
CHANNEL: 1200
When [S-154] SIP Wireless Terminal Backup is used, assign STEP 4 through STEP6 to the mate-SIP server in
the dual configuration.
CHANNEL: 402
CHANNEL: 804
CHANNEL: 1200
195
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
6. System Configuration Data Assignment

This section explains basic data assignment for starting up the system. System configuration data such as system
time, number of modules and units, #0/#1 configuration of controlling system, and data memory capacity are
assigned.
6.1 System Time - ANTPL/ATIM
Select either of the commands ANTPL or ATIM to set system time.

(a) ANTPL - SNTP Setting
Time information for the system is taken in from specified SNTP server. System time is automatically
adjusted periodically by setting the cycle (Note 1).
IP address of DNS server need to be assigned by ADTM command when SNTP is registered by domain name.
(b) ATIM - Date and Time Setting
Specify the current year, month, day, and time (hour, minute, second). System use the specified clock
information during its operation. Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual when you want to
change the system time setting.
Note 1: SNTP service works once a day. When the start time is changed by ANTPL command after activating SNTP
service for that day, the change takes effect on the following day. Activate SNTP service manually by pressing Execute button to activate immediately.
e.g.
1) Start time for SNTP service is set to 01:00
2) At 03:00, the start time is changed by ANTPL command from 01:00 to 05:00.
3) The next start time for SNTP service is 05:00 of the following day.
6.2 System Data - ASYD, ASYDL (LDM), and ASYDN (NDM)
System Data is assigned by ASYD consists of three major categories - SYS1 (Index 0 ~ 511), SYS2 (Index 0 ~
15) and SYS3 (Index 0 ~31). The data of each index is entered in hexadecimal format (00 to FF). Each bit, 0 or
1 (in binary), has its meaning, such as Use of Service A: 0 = No, 1 = Yes.
ASYD SYS1:
INDEX
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
BIT
Number of Module Group (MG) Note 2
0-7
Number of Main Processor
0-7
Configuration of Time Division Switching (TSW)

network Note 3
0-7
196
SYSTEM
DATA
1-IMG
01-02 Hex
4-IMG
01-08 Hex
1-IMG
4-IMG
1-IMG
4-IMG
01 Hex (Fixed)
01 Hex (Single)
02 Hex (Dual)
CHAPTER 5
INDEX
BIT
30
Capacity of Data Memory (DM) Note 4
0-7
31
Capacity of Common Memory (CM)
0-7
58
Configuration of CPU
79
OAI/ACD Service
194
MP (CPU) Mounting Status
0-7
198
IMG0, IMG1 Mounting Status
0-7
199
IMG2, IMG3 Mounting Status
0-7
256
Bit 2 = 1 (Fixed)
Bit 3 = 0 (Fixed)
Bit 4 = 1 (Fixed: IOC card #0 is mounted) Note 5
Bit 5: 0/1 = IOC card #1 is not mounted/mounted
SYSTEM
1-IMG
4-IMG
1-IMG
4-IMG
1-IMG
4-IMG
1-IMG
4-IMG
1-IMG
4-IMG
SYSTEM STARTUP
DATA
Usually 02 Hexadecimal
Usually 02 Hex
Bit 0 = 0 (Single)
Bit 0 = 1 (Dual)
Bit 6 = 0 (In service)
Bit 6 = 1 (Out of service)
01 Hex (Fixed)
1-IMG
03 Hex (Fixed)
4-IMG
33 Hex (Fixed)
1-IMG
00 Hex (Fixed)
4-IMG
03/33 Hex
1-IMG
0-7
4-IMG
14/34 Hex
ASYDL SYS1:
INDEX
BIT
513
Capacity of Local Data Memory (LDM)
0-7
514
Capacity of Network Data Memory (NDM)
0-7
556
PIR0 ~ PIR3 mounting status on IMG0, IMG1
0-7
557
PIR0 ~ PIR3 mounting status on IMG2, IMG3
0-7
1026
UNIT use on MG00-MG03
0-7
1027
UNIT use on MG04-MG07
0-7
197
SYSTEM
1-IMG
4-IMG
1-IMG
4-IMG
1-IMG
4-IMG
DATA
01 Hex
01 Hex
F0 Hex
1-IMG
00 Hex
4-IMG
FF Hex
1-IMG
0F Hex
4-IMG
FF Hex
1-IMG
00 Hex
4-IMG
FF Hex
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
Note 2: As shown in the figure below, a Module Group (MG) consists of two PIRs. 1-IMG of full configuration has
MG 00 and 01, and 4-IMG has MG 00 to 07.
PIR3
MG01
PIR3
PIR2
MG03
MG01
MG05
MG07
PIR2
PIR1
MG00
PIR0
PIR1
TSWR
SV8500
server
BASEU
SV8500
server
BASEU
1-IMG System
MG02
MG00
MG04
MG06
PIR0
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
4-IMG System
Note 3: Configuration of switching block network is shown below.

1-IMG
TSW (PH-SW10) Card in Slot 13 of PIR0
MUX (PH-PC36) Card in Slot 13 of PIR1
TSW (PH-SW10) Card in Slot 14 of PIR0
Switching block network #0
4-IMG
TSW (PH-SW12) Cards in Slot 06/07/08/09 of TSWR
MUX (PH-PC36) Cards in Slot 13 of PIR0/1/2/3 of IMG0
TSW (PH-SW12) Cards in Slot 10/11/12/13 of TSWR
Note 4: When using PS and SIP terminals (Standard SIP terminal, Standard SIP Voice/Video terminal, Wireless
Handset (MH Series), assign 06 hex.

Note 5: An IOC card has a total of four input/output ports (RS-232C ports), and each port provides an interface
between the system and any of the peripheral equipment, such as a printer, PCPro, SMDR, and MCI. Up
to eight ports of IOC can be accommodated per system. Assign bit 5 = 1 to mount IOC card #1.
198
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
6.3 Unit Data - AUNT
Assign the Unit (U) data by using AUNT.

The Unit (U) is the second element of the Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) that specifies the accommodated
location of station/trunk, and is a minimum requirement to be assigned before the entry of station/trunk and other
office data. The pattern of the Unit (U) allocation is shown below:
PIR2
U=2 U=3
MG01
U=0 U=1
PIR1
U=2 U=3
PIR0
MG00
U=0 U=1
TSWR
SV8500
server
BASEU
SV8500
server
BASEU
PIR3
U=2 U=3
MG01
U=0 U=1
U=2 U=3
U=2 U=3
U=2 U=3 PIR3
MG03
U=0 U=1
MG05
U=0 U=1
MG07
U=0 U=1 PIR2
U=2 U=3
U=2 U=3
U=2 U=3
U=2 U=3 PIR1
MG00
U=0 U=1
MG02
U=0 U=1
MG04
U=0 U=1
MG06
U=0 U=1 PIR0
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
4-IMG System
1-IMG System
[Programming]
MG: Module Group Number
TYPE: 1 (Select 1 for Unit data assignment)
UNIT 0: 1/2 (Unit 0 is used/not used)
Note:
System initialization is required for the data change to take effect.
199
BASEU
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
7. Program Version Upgrade

To upgrade the version of system program on operating SV8500 server, install version upgrade program to CF
card. Follow the procedures in this section.
7.1 Preparation
Install PCPro Tools and PCPro application on a maintenance PC in advance.
Enable FTP feature for LAN1 by assigning ADTM command.

1.) Run ADTM command. Select LAN1 on [Select LAN Interface], and then click [Read] button.
2.) On Options tab, select [Activation Setting of Internal Server] and click [Execute] button.
3.) Place a checkmark for FTP Server and close the window.
4.) FTP turns enabled after exiting ADTM command.
Assign Connection Account for PCPro Tools.
Referring to Section 1. Preparing License File, prepare required SVI file beforehand.
7.2 Install Version Upgrade Program
Install version upgrade program to CF card. Follow the steps below for the program writing
procedure.
Note:
The following sections explain the procedure of writing the program to drive D of CF
card. Read the procedure switching the drive name D to A when you want to write the
program to drive A.
Program Version Upgrade for Single Configuration
Program Version Upgrade for Dual Configuration
7.2.1
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Program Version Upgrade for Single Configuration
STEP 1: Launch PCPro Tools on the maintenance PC, and then set the install CD for program version upgrade
in the disk drive.
disk drive
stored on the maintenance PC (C:\Program Files\PCPro Tools\Data\InstallDataName).
200
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
* Do not eject the CD during importing the install data file.

B/C)] and then click [Execute] button.
STEP 4: Check the current operating drive is [PROG-A] and check the operating drive of office data.
STEP 5: On PCPro Tools, select [Program] and [Drive D]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection
Account Name] and click [Execute] button. Select [Upload] for Operation and select the install data
name assigned in STEP 2, and then click [Execute] button. Check the result ## finish. ## is displayed to see the upload is completed.
STEP 6: On PCPro Tools, select [License] and [Drive D]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection
Account Name] and click [Execute] button. Select [Upload] for Operation and select the saved file
name on importing the SVI file, and then click [Execute] button. Check the result succeed. is displayed to see the upload is completed.
Name] and click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Read VERSION Side D] and
then click [Execute] button.
STEP 8: Check the version of program uploaded to drive D.
STEP 9: Launch PCPro and run SINZ command. On the menu bar, from [Option] [Drive Select], select
[Drive D] for program and select the drive for office data assigned in STEP 4. Execute [Reboot] on
Option tab. Note 1
Note 1: SV8500 server takes about five minutes to reboot.
STEP 10: Check the ON LINE lamp lights on the front panel of SV8500 server.
B/C)] and then click [Execute] button.
STEP 12: Check the current operating drive is [PROG-D].
STEP 13: On PCPro, run DISS command. Select Main Memory for Type, and click [Read] button.
STEP 14: Check the operating program version is the same as the program version of the installed CD.
* For more details on getting activation code, refer to the manual on the registration site.
* When wrong activation code is entered by mistake, run AACT command again to enter correct activation code.
STEP 17: When the office data is changed during program version upgrade process, backup the office data using MEM_HDD command or PCPro Tools.
201
CHAPTER 5
7.2.2
Note:
SYSTEM STARTUP
Program Version Upgrade for Dual Configuration
The following STEPs explain the upgrading procedure using the system #0 is in ACT and #1 is in ST-BY
operation.
STEP 1: Launch PCPro Tools on the maintenance PC, and then set the install CD for program version upgrade
in the disk drive.
disk drive
stored on the maintenance PC (C:\Program Files\PCPro Tools\Data\InstallDataName).
* Do not eject the CD during importing the install data file.
STEP 3: On PCPro Tools, select [System Control] and [System #1]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection Account Name] and click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Read LM/DM
ACT Side (A/D, B/C)] and then click [Execute] button.
STEP 5: On PCPro Tools, select [Program], [System #1], and [Drive D]. Select the assigned account name in
[Connection Account Name] and click [Execute] button. Select [Upload] for Operation and select the
install data name assigned in STEP 2, and then click [Execute] button. Check the result ## finish.
## is displayed to see the upload is completed.
STEP 6: On PCPro Tools, select [License], [System #1], and [Drive D]. Select the assigned account name in
saved file name on importing the SVI file, and then click [Execute] button. Check the result succeed. is displayed to see the upload is completed.
Name], select [System #1], and click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Read VERSION Side D] and then click [Execute] button.
STEP 9: On PCPro Tools, select [System Control] and [System #0]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection Account Name] and click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Read LM/DM
ACT Side (A/D, B/C)] and then click [Execute] button.
STEP 11: On PCPro Tools, select [Program], [System #0], and [Drive D]. Select the assigned account name in
202
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
install data name assigned in STEP 2, and then click [Execute] button. Check the result ## finish.
## is displayed to see the upload is completed.
STEP 12: On PCPro Tools, select [License], [System #0], and [Drive D]. Select the assigned account name in
saved file name on importing the SVI file, and then click [Execute] button. Check the result succeed. is displayed to see the upload is completed.
Name], select [System #0], and click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Read VERSION Side D] and then click [Execute] button.
[Drive D] for program and select the drive for office data assigned in STEP 4. Execute [Reboot] on
Option tab. Note 1
Note 1: SV8500 server takes about five minutes to reboot.
STEP 16: Check the ON LINE lamps light on the front panel of both #0 and #1 CPU cards.
STEP 17: On PCPro, run DISS command. Select Main Memory for Type, and click [Read] button.
STEP 18: Check the operating program version on ACT side is the same as the program version of the installed
CD.
STEP 19: On PCPro, run CMOD command to changeover the ACT side from #0 to #1. Select Change Operating Mode for TYPE, enter 1 for DEVICE, and click [Execute] button. Check the lamp lighting
on the front panel of EMA card switches from SYS0 to SYS1.
STEP 20: Run DISS command again. Select Main Memory for Type, and click [Read] button.
STEP 21: Check the operating program version on the changed over ACT side is the same as the program version of the installed CD.
STEP 22: Run CMOD command again to changeover the ACT side from #1 to #0.
* For more details on getting activation code, refer to the manual on the registration site.
* When wrong activation code is entered by mistake, run AACT command again to enter correct activation code.
STEP 25: When the office data is changed during program version upgrade process, backup the office data using MEM_HDD command or PCPro Tools.
203
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
7.3 Turn Back to Former Version of Program
When any problem is found after program version upgrade, turn back the program to the former version following the procedure below.
7.3.1
Turn Back to Former Version of Program in Single Configuration
(a) When PCPro is available to access:

[Drive A] for program. Execute [Reboot] on Option tab.
STEP 2: After rebooting, run DISS command. Select Main Memory for Type, and click [Read] button.
STEP 3: Check the operating program version turns back to the same version before installing.
STEP 4: Run ATIM command to set the time data. Perform connection test.
(b) When PCPro Tools is available to access (but PCPro is not available):
STEP 1: Select [System Control]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection Account Name] and click
[Execute] button. On process select window, select [Change LM A <-> D] and then click [Execute]
button to changeover the program. Changeover is completed when switch from PROG-D to PROGA succeed! is displayed.
STEP 2: After the changeover, select [System Control] again. On process select window, select [System Reboot] and click [Execute] button.
(c) When neither PCPro nor PCPro Tools are available:
Note:
This procedure is for emergency. Usually perform the startup and program version upgrade with normal
procedure. Perform the following STEPs disconnecting SV8500 server and the maintenance PC from the
network, because the IP address of LAN1 turns default value.
STEP 1: On the front panel of CPU card, set the SW1 on the MODE switch from OFF ON.
STEP 2: Reboot the system pressing the PWR switch on the front panel of CPU card.
* Press and hold for four seconds to turn off SV8500 server and check the PWR lamp goes off. Press
the PWR switch again to reboot.
STEP 3: LAN1s IP address turns default value (192.168.0.2). Change the IP address on the maintenance PC
enable to access LAN1.
204
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
STEP 4: On PCPro Tools, place a checkmark for Use default IP address, select [System Control], and then
click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Change LM A <-> D] and then click [Execute] button to changeover the program. Changeover is completed when switch from PROG-D to
PROG-A succeed! is displayed.
STEP 5: Set the SW1 on the MODE switch back from ON OFF, and connect SV8500 server to the network.
STEP 6: Select [System Control] again. On process select window, select [System Reboot] and click [Execute] button.
7.3.2
Turn Back to Former Version of Program in Dual Configuration
(a) When PCPro is available to access:

[Drive A] for program. Execute [Reboot] on Option tab.
Note:
Reboot with drive A on both system #0 and #1.
(b) When PCPro Tools is available to access (but PCPro is not available):
Note:
Execute the STEPs below for system #0 first, and then for #1 in order.
STEP 1: Select [System Control]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection Account Name] and click
[Execute] button. On process select window, select [Change LM A <-> D] and then click [Execute]
button to changeover the program. Changeover is completed when switch from PROG-D to PROGA succeed! is displayed.
STEP 2: After the changeover, select [System Control] again. On process select window, select [System Reboot] and click [Execute] button.
205
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM STARTUP
(c) When neither PCPro nor PCPro Tools are available:

Note:
- This procedure is for emergency. Usually perform the startup and program version upgrade with normal
procedure.
- Execute the following procedure for system #0 and #1 separately. Otherwise duplicate IP address cannot
complete the program changeover.

- Perform the following STEPs disconnecting SV8500 server and the maintenance PC from the network,
because the IP address of LAN1 turns default value.

STEP 1: On the front panel of CPU card, set the SW1 on the MODE switch from OFF ON.
STEP 2: Reboot the system pressing the PWR switch on the front panel of CPU card.
* Press and hold for four seconds to turn off SV8500 server and check the PWR lamp goes off. Press
the PWR switch again to reboot.
STEP 3: LAN1s IP address turns default value (192.168.0.2). Change the IP address on the maintenance PC
enable to access LAN1.
STEP 4: On PCPro Tools, place a chicanery for Use default IP address, select [System Control], and then
click [Execute] button. On process select window, select [Change LM A <-> D] and then click [Execute] button to changeover the program. Changeover is completed when switch from PROG-D to
PROG-A succeed! is displayed.
STEP 5: Set the SW1 on the MODE switch back from ON OFF, and connect SV8500 server to the network.
STEP 6: Select [System Control] again. On process select window, select [System Reboot] and click [Execute] button.
206
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
INSTALLATION TEST
This chapter explains the installation test procedure to check Telephony Server operates normally and the connection between stations/trunks have been established. After starting up the
system, establish some basic connections and verify the system operates normally.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
1.
Operation Check
SV8500 operation check

Circuit card operation check
System initialization by switch operation

Circuit card operation check
Dial Tone connection test

Station-to-Station connection test
2.
System Initialization Test
3.
Basic Connection Test
4.
System Changeover Test
Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual.
5.
Speech Path Test
Speech path (PCM signal route) connection check
6.
Port Connection Test
Connection test for line, trunk, and power circuit cards
Connection test for C.O. line and Tie line on trunk basis
IPPAD card operation check

Connection test between IP terminals and Digital terminals/Analog TELs
7.
Overall Test
8.
IPPAD Connection Test
END
Note:
Operation tests concerning circuit card are supposed to be performed on the SV8500 system with PIR.
207
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
1. Operation Check
Check the lamps on the front panel to see SV8500 server is operating normally.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
Is the ON LINE lamp lighting green?
If the ON LINE lamp remains OFF, SV8500 server is not operating normally.
Check the followings:
Is the PWR lamp lighting green?

Is the power cable firmly connected?
Is the Power switch turned ON?
Is the electricity supplied?
Is the LAN1 LINK lamp lighting green?

SV8500 server may not be physically connected to the LAN. Check the Ether cable between
SV8500 server and the network device such as switching HUB/router.
Use a straight Ether cable.
Test the continuity in the Ether cable.
If the LOAD lamp also remains OFF, CF card might not be installed. Check
the CF card.
Make sure the network device (switching HUB or router) is turned ON.
If the problem is not cleared, change the Ether cable or change the network device.
END
208
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
2. System Initialization Test

Check whether the system initialization can be executed.
ATTENTION
2.1 System Initialization Test
Perform the system initialization test by switch operation and SINZ command.
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
System initialization test by INIT switch (Non-load initialization)

Telephony Server reboots with the current main memory and the office data exist in DRAM.
Press the INIT button on the front panel of EMA card.

Check the lamps on the front panel of EMA card.
PWR: Lights green
LINK: Lights green
ACT: Lights green
Set the current date and time on PCPro.
System Initialization test by power ON/OFF (Program and office data load initialization)
Telephony Server reboots loading the program and the office data saved in CF card.
Referring to Section 4. "Power ON/OFF Procedure", turn OFF the power of Telephony Server.
Turn ON the power of Telephony Server.
Check the lamp on the front panel of CPU card.
ON LINE: Lights green
209
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
A
System Initialization test by SINZ command
Telephony Server (both #0 and #1 in dual configuration) reboots by the selected initialization type.
Run the SINZ command on PCPro.

Select the initialization type, and then click the Execute button.
System Initialization
Office Data Load & System Initialize
Program Load & System Initialize
Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize
Check the lamps on the front panel of EMA card.
PWR: Lights green
LINK: Lights green
ACT: Lights green
When the system is initialized, System Message 7-B is output to PCPro.
System Initialization test by PCPro Tools

Note:
- The following procedure is for emergency use in the occasion that PCPro is not
available to access. Usually use SINZ command for system initialization.

- Execute the following procedure for system #0 first, and then for #1 in order.
On PCPro Tools menu, select [System Control]. Specify the following parameters, and then
click [Execute] button.
Connection Account Name
System #0 or #1 to be initialized.
Select [System Shutdown] and click [Execute] button. Telephony Server is shut down after
about 30 seconds. Turn OFF the Power switch.
Turn ON the Power switch again.
Execute the RALM command to clear the output System Message.
END
210
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
2.2 Circuit Card Initialization Test
Perform the following switch operation on all the line/trunk circuit cards mounted on each PIR to check the
cards are operating normally.
START
Flip the MB key UP on the selected line/trunk circuit card.
The OPE lamp goes OFF.
System Message 7-K is output.
Flip the MB key DOWN.

The OPE lamp lights.
System Message 7-L is output.
Clear the alarm indication by executing RALM command on PCPro.
END
211
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
3. Basic Connection Test
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
3.1 Dial Tone Connection Test
DT, ROT
Follow the testing procedure below to check the tone

and the lamp indication on the circuit card when an
station hangs up.
Station
A
LC
START
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is lighting on the RST circuit card.
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is lighting on the LC circuit card.
Station A lifts the handset.

Confirm that Station A receives Dial Tone (DT).
Check whether the Busy lamp (R) is lighting on the connected ORT and LC.
Keep listening DT for about 12 seconds on Station A.

Confirm that DT changes to Reorder Tone (ROT).
Keep listening to ROT for about 30 seconds.

When ASYD SYS1, INDEX 64, b3=0 and b4=0 are assigned.
Confirm that ROT changes to no tone.
When ASYD SYS1, INDEX 64, b3=0 and b4=1, or b3=1 and b4=0 are assigned.
Confirm that howler tone is heard after ROT stops (analog ports only).
Hang up Station A to release the connection.
END
212
ORT
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
3.2 Station-to-Station Connection Test
DT, ROT
Confirm that Station-to-Station connection can be established between Station A and Station B.
ORT
Station
A
LC
Station
B
LC
START
RG
Station A goes off-hook.

Station A hears Dial Tone (DT).
Station A dials the station number of Station B.

Station A confirms that DT stops when the first digit is dialed.
Station A confirms that Ring Back Tone (RBT) is heard after completing the dialing.
Station B hears Ringing Tone on the telephone set.

Station B lifts the handset to answer the call.
Station-to-Station connection between Station A and Station B is established.
Both stations hang up. The connection is released.
END
213
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
4. System Changeover Test

Operation and Maintenance Manual covers the following system changeover procedure for dual configuration:
CPU system changeover
TSW and speech path changeover for 1-IMG and 4-IMG
PLO changeover
214
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
5. Speech Path Test

Perform the following test procedure to check the speech path (PCM signal route) is established between all the PIRs.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
Turn the #0 side of TSW to active state by flipping the MBR key on TSW card or using CMOD command
on PCPro.
Originating station-to-station calls on stations, check the speech condition, such as speech level, noise,
one-way speech, or no speech, between every PIR.
Called Modules
PIR0
U=0
PIR0
Originating Modules
PIR1
PIR2
PIR3
PIR1
U=1
U=2
PIR2
U=3
U=0
PIR3
U=1
U=2
U=3
U=0
U=1
U=2
U=3
U=0
U=1
U=2
U=3
Turn the #1 side of TSW to active state. Repeat the above test procedure to all the PIRs via the #1 side
of TSW.
END
215
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6. Port Connection Test

This section describes the connection test procedure for line, trunk, and PWR cards according to the kind of connection and the feature of each circuit card.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
6.1 ORT (RST Card) Connection Test

DT, RBT
ORT
Station A (DP)
Station B (PB)
LC
LC
RG
START
Make busy all the ORTs
On the front of the RST card, set all MBT switches (0-7) to OFF to
make all the ORTs busy.
From Station A (DP),

test ORTs one circuit at
a time.
Make idle the only one ORT to be tested.

Station A goes off-hook, and after hearing DT, dials the station
number of Station B.
Station A confirms ringing to Station B, and Station B answers.
Stations A and B go on-hook.
From Station B (PB),

test ORTs one circuit at
a time.
Make idle the only one ORT to be tested.

Station A goes off-hook, and after hearing DT, dials the station
Station A confirms ringing to Station B, and Station B answers.
Stations A and B go on-hook.
216
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
A
Make all the ORTs busy to test the connection according to the system data setting.
ASYD SYS1, INDEX 4, b0=0

Station A confirms ROT is heard.
Station A goes on-hook.
ASYD SYS1, INDEX 4, b0=1

Station A confirms no tone is heard.
Make idle a single ORT circuit.
Station A confirms DT is heard.
END
217
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.2 ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test

ATTCON
ATI
DT, RBT
ATI
Station A
LC
START
An station repeats an
ATTCON call. Each ATTCON answers the call.
Station A dials the operator access code (normally 0).

At each ATTCON, the operator confirms the ATT lamp flashes and
ringing tone sounds.
At each ATTCON, the operator answers the call by pressing the
ATND key.
Station A confirms speech with each ATTCON.
The operator at each ATTCON releases by pressing the CANCEL
key.
Each ATTCON calls an

station by pressing
LOOP keys individually.
At each ATTCON, the operator dials the station number of Station A

by using the LOOP keys (L1-L6) individually.
Ringing tone sounds on Station A.
Station A answers the call and confirms speech.
The operator at the ATTCON releases by pressing the CANCEL key.
END
218
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.3 Line (LC, ELC Cards) Connection Test

LC/ELC
Line being
tested
(XXXX)
ATTCON/
Digital terminal
ATI/ELC
DT, RBT
START
An ATTCON or Digital
terminal is called from
each station. The called
party confirms the station number.
On the Main Distributed Frame (MDF), connect an analog telephone

to the line circuit to be tested.
The test station (XXXX) goes off-hook and hears Dial Tone (DT).
The test station (XXXX) calls an ATTCON or Digital terminal.
The called ATTCON or Digital terminal answers the call, and
confirms speech and the station number of the calling station.
The call is released.
The ATTCON or Digital

terminal calls the test station.
The ATTCON or Digital terminal dials the station number of the test
station.
The called station answers and confirms speech.
The ATTCON or Digital terminal confirms that the dialed number
and the test station number is the same.
The station involved is

assigned as a Hot Line or
a House Phone.
The test station goes off-hook and hears Ring Back Tone (RBT).
The test station checks whether the call is routed to the
predetermined station/ATTCON or the call is originated to the
predetermined trunk.
The called party answers the call and confirms speech.
END
219
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.4 Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Cards) Connection Test
The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up an outgoing test connection for each outgoing trunk, that
speech is established and that the call can be released.
Test the outgoing trunks individually, using the sequence of Routes and Trunk numbers assigned at each office.
START
When a C.O. line or Tie line is not

connected with a trunk circuit, set
up a temporary cross connection,
as a loop-back circuit on the MDF
between the outgoing trunk to be
tested and the terminating trunk.
Referring to the figures on the next page, setup a temporary

cross connection as a loop-back circuit on the MDF.
Make busy all the outgoing trunks.
Flip the MB key on the front panel of trunk cards to turn all
the outgoing trunks make-busy state.
Test the trunk circuits individually

by establishing access from an station.
Make idle the only trunk to be tested.
Temporarily assign the office data on the PCPro to

establish a loop-back connection from the test trunk.
Dial the access code of the testing trunk and the destination
number on a station.
The called party answers.
The station confirms speech.
Set up a temporary cross connection for the next trunk to be
tested.
Restore the temporary connections and the office data to their original state.
END
220
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. trunk (COT) to be tested and an station line.
COT Test Configuration
LC
LC
LC
COT
The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.

TLT Test Configuration
LC
TLT
LC
TLT
Set up a loop-back connection between the TIE Line Trunk (TLT) to be tested and another EMT.
If the TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk, connect the related leads as shown below.
TLT
TLT
If the TLT is a 2W E&M system, connect the related leads as shown below:
TLT
221
TLT
CHAPTER 6
If the TLT is a 4W E&M system, connect the related leads as shown below:
Receive
TLT
Send
INSTALLATION TEST
T
R
T
R
T
R
E
M
T
R
E
M
Receive
TLT
Send
Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI trunk to be tested and another DTI trunk as shown below:
DTI Test Configuration
LC
DTI
LC
DTI
Receive
RA
RB
RA
RB
Receive
Send
TA
TB
TA
TB
Send
DTI
DTI
If the office is the primary office (clock-source-office), perform the tests by disconnecting the PLO and the
M-OSC. (The mode of the PLO becomes self operation mode.)
222
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.5 Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Cards) Connection Test
The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up a test connection for each incoming trunk, that speech is
possible with the ATTCON when a Ringdown Signal Interface is used, or with an station when a Dial-In Signal
Interface is used. This test also confirms that the call can be released. Incoming trunks test the incoming trunks,
individually using the sequence of Route and Trunk Numbers assigned at each office.
START
Set up a temporary cross connection, as a loop-back circuit on the

MDF, between the incoming trunk
to be tested and an outgoing trunk.
Set up a temporary MDF cross connections on the MDF

for a loop-back circuit.
Temporarily assign the office data on PCPro to establish a
loop-back connection from the test trunk.
Make busy all of the outgoing trunks other than the cross-connected trunk.
Test the incoming trunk individually.

For a Ringdown Signal Interface.
Station A dials the station number of Station C.

The call terminates to an ATTCON.
The ATTCON answers the call and confirms speech.
Set up temporary connections for the next trunk to be
tested.
For a Dial-In Signal Interface.
Station A dials the access code for the outgoing trunk and
the station number of Station B.
Station B answer the call and confirms speech.
Set up temporary connections for the next trunk to be
tested.
Restore the temporary cross connections and the office data to their original state.
END
223
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
COT
6.6 Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT)

Connection Test
DIT
Station
A
LC
Station
B
LC
LC
START
On the MDF, set up a temporary cross connection between the Direct-In Termination (DIT) trunk and a
Line Circuit (LC).
C.O. line incoming call.
Station B dials the number of Line Circuit C (Station C).
Incoming call to station

via DIT trunk.
The call terminates to Station A. Station A rings.

Confirm that the ringing is district from that of an intra-office call or
an ordinary C.O. call.
*The ringing signal for DIT calls can be the same as that for C.O.
calls if the related office data is assigned.
ASYD, SYS1 INDEX 72, SYS3 INDEX 0, and DR parameter of ARTD
command.
Answer and talk

Station A and B talk with each other.
Release
Station A and B both go on-hook.
Restore the temporary cross connection.
END
224
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.7 SND (RST Card) Connection Test

SND
COT
Station
A
LC
Station
B
LC
ORT
LC
PCPro
START
When a C.O. line or Tie line is not

connected with a trunk circuit, arrange the trunk loop-back connection illustrated above.
On the MDF, set up a temporary cross connection for a

loop-back circuit.
Make busy all the SNDs.
Set all the MBR switches (0-7) to OFF on the RST cards to
make busy all the SNDs.
Test the SNDs individually.
Make idle the only one SND to be tested.
Temporarily assign the office data on the PCPro to

establish a connection with Station B through SND.
Station A dials the access code of the trunk and the station
Station B answers and the speech connection is established.
Both Station A and B go on-hook to release the call.
Restore the temporary connections and the office data to their original state.
END
225
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.8 Three-Party Conference Trunk Function Test
SPDT,RBT
Station
A
LC
Station
B
LC
Station
C
LC
C
F
T
TSW card
START
Make busy all the CFTs.
Turn all the CFT card to make-busy state using MBTK

command.
Test the CFTs individually.
Make idle the only the CFT to be tested.

Establish station-to station call between Station A and B.
Station A performs a switch hook flash and after hearing
DT, dials the station number of Station C.
Station C answers the call.
Station A, after having a talk with Station C, performs a
switch-hook flash and confirms a three-way connection is
established.
All the stations go on-hook to release the call.
Release the make-busy of CFTs.
Make idle the CFTs using MBTK command.
END
226
CHAPTER 6
6.9 Connection Test-Digital Announcement
Trunk for Announcement Service
Station A
LC
INSTALLATION TEST
ANNOUNCEMENT
TRK
DAT
Station B
LC
START
Dial the announcement service code.
Station A dials the announcement service code.
Check the announcement.
Station A is connected to the announcement trunk and

hears the announcement.
Dial the announcement service code.
Station B dials the announcement service code.
Check the announcement.
Station B is connected to the announcement trunk and

hears the announcement.
Release
Confirm the announcement stops when both stations go

on-hook.
END
227
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.10 Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging

Access Service
Station
A
LC
PGT
AMP
SP
ATTCON
START
Dial the paging access code.
Station A/ATTCON dials the paging access code and hears

Continuous Ring-back Tone.
The Continuous Ring-back Tone stops in approximately
one second.
Check the speaker paging.
Check whether speaker paging sounds after the Continuous

Ring-back Tone stopped.
Release
Station A goes on-hook or ATTCON presses the CANCEL

key.
END
228
CHAPTER 6
6.11 Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging
Transfer Service
Paged Station
C
LC
Select Paging Transfer service as per system data,

SYS1, INDEX 73.
Hold Station
B
LC
Non-Delay System
Paging Station
A
LC
Delay and Non-Delay System
Paging Transfer Supervision
INSTALLATION TEST
PGT
AMP
SP
START
Call the paging trunk.
Station A and B establish station-to-station connection.

Station A performs a switch-hook flash and hears Special
DT. Station B is held on the line.
Station A dials the paging access code and hears
Continuous Ringback Tone. The tone stops in
approximately one second, and Station A can page over the
speaker.
The paging party
For Non-Delay: Station A remains on hold.

For Delay with Paging Transfer Supervision: Station A
hangs up.
The paged party answers
Station C (the paged party) dials the paging access code to

answer.
Connect
Non-Delay
Station C is connected to Station A.

When Station A hangs up, Station B and C are
automatically connected.
Delay
A rings and picks up the headset.

Station A is connected to Station C.
When Station A hangs up, Station B and C are
automatically connected.Station
Paging Transfer Supervision
Station C is connected to Station B.
END
229
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
6.12 Connection Test-Radio Paging Trunk

(COT)
RG
COT
Station A
LC
COT
Station B
LC
RBT
RADIO PAGING
SECONDARY STATION
START
Call the Radio Paging equipment
By hearing Continuous Ringback Tone from the Radio

Paging equipment, Station A confirms the secondary
station is being paged, then goes on-hook.
The paging radio of the secondary station starts ringing.
Station A dials the radio paging access code and hears
Special DT from the Radio Paging equipment, and then
dials the secondary station number.
The paged party answer
The secondary station (the radio-pages party) dials the

paging answer code at nearby Station B, hears Special DT
through the Radio Paging equipment, then dials the paging
answer code.
Station A rings and picks up the handset.
Confirm Station A and B can talk.
Release
Station A and B both go on-hook.
END
230
CHAPTER 6
6.13 Howler and Ringing Signal Test
INSTALLATION TEST
Howler Signal
The Howler Tone Generator and the Ringing Generator are equipped on the DC-DC power card (PAPW55-C/54-C). The purpose of this test is to confirm
the ringing signal by setting up an station-to-station
connection and a howler tone connection from an station accommodated in any PIR.
LC
Station A
RG
Station B
LC
Station C
LC
RBT
START
Check the DC-DC power #0 is ON.

Check the howler tone.
An station on the PIR of testing PWR card is mounted goes

off-hook. (Analog port only)
The station hears Dial Tone (DT).
In approximately 12 seconds, the station hears Reorder
Tone (ROT).
Approximately 30 seconds later, the station should
confirm hearing howler tone.
Check the ringing signal.
Establish an station-to-station call between two stations on

the PIR of testing PWR card is mounted. (Analog port
only)
Confirm the Ringing signal is sent out.
Changeover the PWR to DC-DC power #1 and perform the test above.
END
231
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
7. Overall Test
Perform the overall test to check C.O. Line and Tie Line by connecting to COT/TLT trunks
on individual trunk basis. Check the speech conditions (speech level, presence of noise, oneway speech, no speech, etc.) over the connection to the distant office.
7.1 Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call
Central
Office
Exchange
Telephony
Server
Station A
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
LC
COT
ATI
COT
ATI
COT
ATTCON
ATTCON
START
Seize the trunk to be tested.

When seizing from an station.
Place the trunk to be tested to idle state, and make all the
other trunks busy.
Station A dials the trunk access code.
Station A, after hearing DT from the C.O. line, dials the
pilot number for the local office to terminate the call to the
office through the loop-back at the C.O..
When seizing from an ATTCON.
An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk

designated through Individual Trunk Access service.
The ATTCON, after hearing DT from the C.O. line, dials
the pilot number for the local office to terminate the call to
the office through the loop-back at the C.O..
The call terminates to the ATTCON looped-back at the

C.O..
232
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
Check the speech conditions.
When the call terminates to the ATTCON, check the

speech conditions including speech level, presence of
noise, and one-way speech state.
Release
When all of the COTs have been
checked and a fault is detected.
Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O., and identify

whether the trunk side or the C.O. line side is faulty.
If the C.O. line side is faulty, submit a repair request to the
carrier.
END
233
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
7.2 Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call
Perform the test according to the C.O. Line Number Table that is provided by the carrier. If the C.O. Line numbers are not known, these tests cannot be performed because a loop-back at the C.O. cannot be executed that
involves Direct Inward Dialing cannot be performed. Under such circumstances, ask the carrier to perform an
incoming test.
Central
Office
Exchange
SV8500
LC
COT
ATTCON
COT
ATI
COT
ATTCON
START
An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk

designated through Individual Trunk Access service.
After hearing DT from the C.O. line, dials the C.O. line
number of the testing trunk on the ATTCON.
The call terminates to the ATTCON looped-back at the

C.O..
When the call terminates to the ATTCON, check the

speech conditions including speech level, presence of
noise, and one-way speech state.
Release
When all of the COTs have been
checked and a fault is detected.
Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O., and identify

whether the trunk side or the C.O. line side is faulty.
If the C.O. line side is faulty, submit a repair request to the
carrier.
END
234
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
7.3 Overall Test for CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call
SV8500-A
Station A
SV8500-B
Station B
LC
LC
ATTCON
ATI
(SV8500 to be tested)
START

When seizing from a station.
Place the trunk to be tested to idle state, and make all the
other trunks busy.
When seizing from an ATTCON.
Station A dials station number of Station B in SV8500-B.
The call terminates to Station B in

SV8500-B.
The call terminates to Station B, via CCIS Tie line.
When the call terminates to Station B, check the speech

conditions including speech level, presence of noise, and
one-way speech state.
Release
When all of the CCIS Tie line
trunks have been checked and a
fault is detected.
Perform the fault localization procedure when a CCIS Tie

line fault occurs. (See Procedure A on the next page.)
If the distant office is faulty, submit a repair request to the
distant office.
END
235
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
<Procedure A>
START
Flip the MB key UP on the DTI/CCT circuit card.

In any office other than the primary office (clock-source-office), disconnect the DTI/CCT cable
connector at the DTI/CCT side (PIR backplane).
PLO alarm is generated. Ignore it.
PLO starts running by itself.
Use a paired wire to make the following connection at the MDF.
DTI/CCT
LEADS
TA
MDF
CROSS
CONNECTION
TB
RA
RB
The DTI does not recover.

(CCH/CCT link failure may occur,
but ignore it.)
System Message 3-J is not displayed.
The DTI does not recover.

(CCH/CCT link failure may occur,
but ignore it.)
System Message 3-J is displayed.
The DTI/CCT is faulty.
The DTI/CCT is normal.

Submit a repair request to the distant office.
END
236
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
7.4 Overall Test for CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call
Station A
SV8500-A
SV8500-B
LC
Station B
LC
(SV8500 to be tested)
START
Turn the trunk to be tested to idle state, and make all the
other trunks busy.
Terminate the incoming call to

Station A in the self-office.
An incoming call from the distant office terminates to

Station A.
When Station A answers, check the speech conditions

including speech level, presence of noise, and one-way
speech state.
Release
When all of the CCIS Tie line
trunks have been checked and a
fault is detected.
Perform the fault localization procedure when a CCIS Tie

line fault occurs. (See Procedure A in Section 7.3.)
If the distant office is faulty, submit a repair request to the
distant office.
END
237
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
7.5 Connection and Alternate Routing Test to Tie Line
START
Individually test the trunks in the

primary route.
Make busy all of the trunks in the primary route except the
trunk to be tested.
Station A calls Station B via the primary route.
After Station B answers, check the speech conditions
including the speech level, presence of noise, and one-way
speech.
Release.
Make busy all the trunks in the primary route.

Individually test the trunks in the
alternate route.
Make busy all of the trunks in the primary route except the
trunk to be tested.
Station A calls Station B via the primary route.
After Station B answers, check the speech conditions
including the speech level, presence of noise, and one-way
speech.
Release.
Release the trunks' make-busy.
END
Tie Line Network and Public Network Combination

Basic Route
Tie Line
Network
TRKs
Station A
SV8500 to
be tested
Alternate
Route
TRKs
Public
Network
238
SV8500
Station B
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
Tie Line Network

Basic Route
SV8500
TRKs
Station A
Alternate
Route
SV8500 to be
tested
TRKs
SV8500
239
SV8500
Station B
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
7.6 Tandem Connection Test to Tie Line
IRT
Primary Route
SV8500
(1)
Station A
SV8500
TRKs
Alternate
Route
TRKs
(3)
Station B
TRKs
(2)
SV8500
SV8500
Telephony Server
to be tested
ATTCON
Station C
(1):
(2):
(3):
Direct tandem connection by dial-in

Tandem connection via ATTCON
Tandem connection via Station
START
Test the Direct Dial-in tandem connection

Test the Primary Route.
Station A and Station B.

Confirm the speech between Station A calls Station B.
Release.
Test the Alternate Route.
Make busy all the trunks in the primary route.

Station A calls Station B.
Confirm the speech between Station A and B.
Release
Make idle all the trunks.
240
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
A
Test the tandem connection via
an ATTCON.
Station A dials the access code for the ATTCON.

The ATTCON answers and sets up a tandem connection to
Station B.
The ATTCON releases. Confirm the speech between Station
A and B.
Release.
Test the tandem connection via

an station.
Station A calls Station C.

Station C, after answering, perform a switch-hook flash and
then calls Station B.
After Station B answers, Station C releases. Confirm the
speech between Station A and B.
Release.
END
241
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
7.7 PAD Setting
For the system, Packet Assemblers and Disassemblers (PADs) can be set according to the Tie lines connecting
status.
(a) For an outgoing/incoming call via a TIE Line:
Through the PCPro command, ARTD, or through the switch settings on the TLT circuit card.
(b) For a tandem TIE Line connection:
Through the PCPro command, APAD or through the switch settings on the TLT circuit card(s).
At both the originating and terminating offices, an 8 dB PAD is set for the EMT route through the ARTD command or through the switch settings. At the tandem office, a 4 dB PAD is set for the terminating and originating
sides of each EMT route through the APAD command.
Through this arrangement, an 8 dB PAD is in service for outgoing and incoming connections, and 4 dB PADs
are in service for each line in a tandem connection (total: 8 dB). PAD Setting Example shows this arrangement.
PAD Setting Example
Originating Office
0 dB
EMT
Tandem Office
Carrier
Terminal
0
Carrier
Terminal
8 dB -8
8 dB
-8
EMT
PAD
4 dB
4 dB
8 dB
Terminating Office
0 dB
8 dB -8
8 dB
8 dB
EMT
-8
Carrier
Terminal
Carrier
Terminal
242
4 dB
PAD
EMT
4 dB
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
When setting up a CCIS Network, the PAD setting differ from those in an analog network.
(c) For an outgoing call to/incoming call from a Tie line:
Through the ARTD command.
(d) For a tandem Tie line connection:
Through the APAD command.
At both the originating and terminating offices, 0 dB is set to the outgoing side and 8 dB is set to the terminating
side of the DTI/CCT route through the ARTD command.
At the tandem office, 0 dB is set for both the terminating and originating sides of each DTI/CCT route through
the APAD command.
The figure below shows this arrangement.
PAD Setting Example for CCIS
Originating Office
Tandem Office
DTI/CCT
0 dB
0 dB
DTI/CCT
0 dB
-8 dB
0 dB
8
Terminating Office
DTI/CCT
0 dB
0 dB
-8 dB
0 dB
0 dB
243
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
8. IPPAD Connection Test

This section describes the procedures to confirm the normal operation of the IPPAD (SPA32IPLB) circuit card. Perform the connection test between IP terminals and conventional terminals (Digital terminal and analog terminals) or existing trunks (COT, TLT, etc.) mounted
on PIR. Perform the test with other combinations of terminals, as needed.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
IPPAD Connection Test Diagram

SV8500
(*A)
IPPAD (PA-32IPLB)
PC
OPE
(*B)
LC/ELC
IPPAD
4 6
Network Equipment
(SW HUB, Router, etc)
PCM
IP Packet
VC0
CPU card
PZ-16VCTB
(Sub board 1)
PSTN
32ch
VC3
PZ-16VCTB
(Sub board 0)
TRK
(*C)
LINK
RJ45 Connector
IP Terminal
244
Analog Terminal
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
START
[1] Confirm that OPE lamp (*A) on IPPAD is lighting.
NO
YES
The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to
the next step.
1) Remove and insert the circuit card.
2) Make sure of office data and mount location data by using AFPC, ACTK, and ALIDL.
3) Initialize the circuit card.
4) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.
5) Replace the circuit card.
[2] Confirm that VC0-3 lamps (*B) on IPPAD are lighting when using voice compression sub card.
The lamps on the circuit card turn on in the following condition:
-When a sub card (Sub PKG0) is installed : VC0 and VC1 turn on.
-When two sub cards (Sub PKG0/1) are installed : VC0, VC1, VC2 and VC3 turn on.
NO
YES
The following explains how to solve the problems. When the problem can not be solved by the step, go to
the next step.
1) Remove and insert the circuit card.
2) Initialize the circuit card.
3) Re-download the firmware into the circuit card by using CD.
4) Replace the circuit card.
[3] Confirm that LINK lamp (*C) on IPPAD is lighting, which indicates that the circuit card is connected to
the network physically.
NO
Make sure LAN cables (straight) are connected correctly.

Check LAN cable by a tester or other equipment.
Check the normality of network equipment (SW HUB, Router, etc.).
YES
245
CHAPTER 6
INSTALLATION TEST
[4] Call the existing terminal (Digital terminal and analog terminal) by using IP terminal.
IPPAD translates voice from IP packets to PCM signaling then sends it to LC/ELC accommodating the
existing terminals.
NO
Check that the speech path channel is unblocked, using MBCT.

Connection restriction is cancelled by using ATNR and ARSC.
Make sure of the settings of DtermIP by using ALIDL, AFPC, ACTL, and AISTL or hardware setting.
YES
[5] Is the speech available ?
NO
Check the office data.
YES
[6] Perform the above procedures between IP terminal and the existing terminal (or the exisiting trunk)
when needed.
END
246
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER 7
FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS
Use the fault recovery procedures in this chapter when a connection cannot be established in the normal manner
or when an abnormal connection is discovered as a result of the installation test.
Connection Error on IP Terminals/SIP Multiple Line Terminals
Irregular Lamp Indications on Circuit Cards
Dial Tone Connection Error
Station-to-Station Connection Error on Digital Terminals/Analog TELs
247
CHAPTER 7
1. Connection Error on IP Terminals/SIP Multiple Line Terminals

1.1 IP Terminals Connection Error
START
IP terminals LCD displays DHCP Connecting... for 30 seconds and login error occurs after
connection timeout.
When login error occurs on a particular IP terminal:
Perform the login operation when the LCD indicates login menu.
Make sure a Ether cable is connected.
When login error occurs on every IP terminal:
Check the SV8500 servers operation (lamp and alarm check).
When IP terminals are connected to the network for the first time, configuration setting is
required on each station.
Check the communication status between SV8500 server and IP terminals.
Execute Ping command on the IP terminals, entering the IP address of SV8500 server as the
destination.
Error message is displayed on IP terminals LCD.
Refer to Peripheral Equipment Description for the explanation on the error messages.
END
248
CHAPTER 7
1.2 SIP Multiple Line Terminals Connection Error
START
SIP Multiple Line terminals LCD displays Connecting... for 30 seconds and login error occurs after
connection timeout.
When login error occurs on a particular SIP Multiple Line terminal:
Connect the terminal with the same network with SV8500 server.
When login error occurs on every SIP Multiple Line terminal:
Check the parameters on the data sheet (data_sheet.xls/csv) are correctly assigned for generating PAC file.
Error message is displayed on IP terminals LCD.
Refer to Peripheral Equipment Description for the explanation on error messages.
END
249
CHAPTER 7
2. Irregular Lamp Indications on Circuit Cards
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
Conduct this check when the green OPE lamps do not illuminate on any circuit cards mounted in a PIR.
Use AUNT command to check that the UNIT data has been assigned.
Replace the TSW/MUX card in the PIR with a spare.
Check that the cable connected to the BUSXX terminal on the PIR backplane is securely
connected.
A PIR will occasionally malfunction due to a single circuit card that is mounted in the PIR.
Therefore, check the circuit cards using the following steps.
Extract all of the circuit cards from the PIR, other than the TSW/MUX and the PWR
cards.
Insert one circuit card into its mounting slot and see if its OPE lamp illuminates. Repeat
this procedure for the remaining circuit cards.
Conduct this check when the green OPE lamp does not illuminate on a line card.
Confirm that the circuit cards MB switch is DOWN.
Use ASDT command to check that the station data is assigned to the circuits on the circuit card.
Replace the circuit card with a spare.
Conduct this check when the OPE lamp on a line circuit card illuminates, but the red BL lamp for an
individual line flashes.
Use MBST command to confirm that the specific line is not in the Make Busy state.
Use ASDT command to check that the station data has been assigned to the line circuit.
250
CHAPTER 7
A
Conduct this check when the green OPE lamp does not illuminate on a trunk circuit card.
Confirm that the circuit cards MB switch is DOWN.
Use ATRK command to check that the trunk data has been assigned for the circuits on the circuit
card.
Conduct this check when a trunk circuit cards OPE lamp illuminates, but the red BL lamp for an
individual circuit flashes.
Confirm that the MB switch, for each circuit on the circuit card, is OFF.
Use MBTK command to confirm that the trunk circuit is not in the make-busy state.
Use ATRK command to check that the trunk data has been assigned for the trunk circuit.
Perform the following check before replacing a defective circuit card with a spare.
Confirm the switch settings on the circuit card.
Poor contact at the circuit cards connector portion may be responsible for the malfunction.
Check the circuit card again by inserting and extracting it several times.
END
251
CHAPTER 7
3. Dial Tone Connection Error
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
Dial Tone is not heard.
On the MDF, check the cross connections between the terminal and the corresponding line
circuit.
Check whether the LT cable is securely connected to the PIR.
Replace the LC card with a spare.
Dial Tone cannot be heard from one or more lines on the same circuit card.
Dial Tone cannot be heard from the lines in a specific PIR.
Check the switch settings on the TSW/MUX card.
Replace the TSW/MUX card with a spare.
Check the switch settings on the TSW card.
Replace the TSW card with a spare.
Check whether the MT24 TSW cable is securely inserted into the connectors on the front edge
of the TSW and MUX cards.
END
252
CHAPTER 7
4. Station-to-Station Connection Error on Digital Terminals/Analog TELs
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
Dial Tone is still heard after a digit is dialed (cannot break Dial Tone).
A specific RST card is involved.
Replace the RST card with a spare.
A specific LC card is involved.
A specific UNIT is involved.
Replace the TSW/MUX card with a spare.
The entire System is involved.
Replace the TSW card with a spare.
Reorder Tone is heard after a station number is dialed.

Use ANPD/ANPDL/ANPDN commands to check the Necessary Number of Digits data.
Use ASPA/ASPAL/ASPAN commands to check the Special Number data.
Use ASDT command to check the Station data.
Use ATNR command to check the Tenant Restriction Class data.
Ringback Tone is heard, but the bell at the called station remains silent.
Check that the called station was assigned the correct LEN data through ASDT command.
When all the stations which are in a specific PIR do not ring, replace the PWR card with a spare.
If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC card, replace the LC card with a spare.
After the call has been answered, noise is heard or the speech path is one-way.
If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC card, then replace the LC card with
a spare.
If the fault involves a specific PIR, then replace either the MUX or TSW card with a spare.
If noise is heard throughout the entire system, then replace the TSW card with a spare.
END
253
CHAPTER 7
254
CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER 8
WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TEST
This chapter explains the sundry tasks and site cleaning that must be performed after completing the installation
tests, pursuant to a normal system cut-over.
After completing all of the required tests, confirm or perform the following:
1.
Manage the Office Data
2.
Prepare the Test Results Report
3.
Mount the Front, Side and Rear Covers
4.
Clean the Site
1. Manage Office Data

This section explains how to backup the office data.
The office data is stored on Data Memory (DM). Telephony Server executes steps based on the CPUs results
when it accesses the DD. If the DMs contents are faulty, or have been changed illegally, then the result could
be an erroneous system operation or a system shutdown.
After completing the installation tests, backup the office data and protect it.
1.1 Office Data Backup
After completing the installation tests, keep the following items at the job site to preserve the office data.
1.
Office Data Programming Sheets

Since the Office Data Programming Sheets should always reflect the most recent data, make entries in pencil.
2.
CF Card for Storing Data

If a major change to the office data is made, especially a change involving System Data (ASYD/ASYDL/
ASYDN commands), the system may not function as expected. To prepare for such an occurrence, maintain a CF card containing the office data before the change and another CF card containing the office data
after the change. The pre-change CF card allows an engineer to restore the system to its previous (running)
condition if the system does not operate properly with the new data.
255
CHAPTER 8
2. Test Result Report

When submitting a test results report to the end user, or when performing tests with the customers representatives in attendance, prepare a Test Results Report and record the test results.
3. Attach Front Covers
After the installation work, attach the front covers to FANU, SV8500 server, and PIR.
FANU Front Cover
Put in the cover positioning the face and back.
Attach the front cover from oblique up to downward.
Front Cover (SVB)
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
CON
SOLE
CF
1
2
ON
MOD
E
USB
CON
SOLE
CF
1
1
2
ON
LINE
3
MOD
E
USB
FRONT
256
CHAPTER 8
PIR Front Cover

Put the cover to the lower part of the PIR, and then lock the key. Take care not to catch the cables.
STEP1: Put the bottom of the front cover in the hooks.
Front Cover
(SVA)
STEP2: Push the upper part of the front cover and shut to.
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
15
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
Hook
CONS
OLE
CF
CONS
OLE
1
2
ON
CF
1
2
ON
MODE
MODE
USB
CONS
OLE
USB
CF
1
CONS
OLE
1
2
ON
LINE
3
MODE
USB
Hook
1
2
ON
LINE
3
MODE
USB
FRONT
FRONT
Note:
CF
To attach front covers to TSWR:

1. Attach Front Cover (SVB) (FANU front cover)
2. Attach the same front cover with PIR (Front Cover (SVA)), putting the cover in the lower part of TSWR
3. Lock the key.
Take care not to catch the cables.
257
CHAPTER 8
SV8500 Server Front Cover

Hooking the tabs on the hooks of the left on SV8500 server, put in the front cover.
[1] Attach the Front Cover (S)
[2] Attach the Front Cover (L)
00
Hook-b
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
Hook-a
06
07
08
09
10
06
07
08
09
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
15
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
CONS
OLE
22
CF
CONS
OLE
1
2
ON
1
2
ON
MODE
MODE
USB
CONS
OLE
USB
CF
1
CONS
OLE
1
2
ON
CF
1
LINE
3
Hook-c
CF
1
2
ON
MODE
LINE
3
MODE
USB
USB
Tab-b
Front Cover (L)
Tab-a
Tab-c
Front Cover (R)

STEP1: Put the Tab-a (2) into the Hook-a.
STEP2: Put the Tab-b (2) into the Hook-b.

STEP3: Push the Tab-c of the Front Cover (L).
258
CHAPTER 8
Note:
See the figure below for the way to remove the front cover. Be careful not to break the tabs.
Removing Front Cover (L)
Removing Front Cover (S)
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
15
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
(1)
CON
SOLE
CF
CON
SOLE
1
2
ON
CF
(1)
1
2
ON
MOD
E
CON
SOLE
CF
1
CON
SOLE
1
2
ON
USB
CF
1
LINE
3
MOD
E
USB
1
2
ON
MOD
E
LINE
3
MOD
E
USB
USB
(2)
(2)
STEP1: Slide the cover rightward, and then pull it.

Do not try to pull out too hard.
STEP1: Slide the cover leftward, and then pull it.

Do not try to pull out too hard.
259
CHAPTER 8
4. Cleaning
Restore the cross connections that were arranged for test purposes to their original condition.
Clean around the racks, rectifier, and MDF.
Gather the test equipment, tools, etc., used during the installation tests.
Dispose of dust, trash, etc.
260
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
The following tables list the system data installed in initial startup. Refer to Command Manual for the detailed
explanation on each INDEX and DATA.
ASYD SYS1
ASYD SYS2
ASYD SYS3
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
01 (00000001)
01 (00000001)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
01 (00000001)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
01 (00000001)
00 (00000000)
10
00 (00000000)
11
00 (00000000)
12
00 (00000000)
13
00 (00000000)
14
00 (00000000)
15
00 (00000000)
16
0C (00001100)
17
00 (00000000)
18
00 (00000000)
19
00 (00000000)
20
00 (00000000)
21
00 (00000000)
22
00 (00000000)
23
00 (00000000)
24
00 (00000000)
25
00 (00000000)
APP-1
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
26
00 (00000000)
27
00 (00000000)
28
00 (00000000)
29
00 (00000000)
30
06 (00000110)
31
02 (00000010)
32
00 (00000000)
33
00 (00000000)
34
00 (00000000)
35
00 (00000000)
36
00 (00000000)
37
00 (00000000)
38
00 (00000000)
39
00 (00000000)
40
00 (00000000)
41
00 (00000000)
42
00 (00000000)
43
00 (00000000)
44
00 (00000000)
45
00 (00000000)
46
00 (00000000)
47
00 (00000000)
48
00 (00000000)
49
00 (00000000)
50
00 (00000000)
51
00 (00000000)
52
00 (00000000)
53
00 (00000000)
54
00 (00000000)
55
00 (00000000)
56
FF (11111111)
57
FF (11111111)
58
00 (00000000)
59
00 (00000000)
60
00 (00000000)
APP-2
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
61
00 (00000000)
62
00 (00000000)
63
00 (00000000)
64
00 (00000000)
65
FF (11111111)
66
00 (00000000)
67
00 (00000000)
68
00 (00000000)
69
00 (00000000)
70
00 (00000000)
71
00 (00000000)
72
00 (00000000)
73
00 (00000000)
74
00 (00000000)
75
00 (00000000)
76
00 (00000000)
77
28 (00101000)
78
00 (00000000)
79
40 (01000000)
80
00 (00000000)
81
00 (00000000)
82
00 (00000000)
83
00 (00000000)
84
FF (11111111)
85
FF (11111111)
86
80 (10000000)
87
FF (11111111)
88
FF (11111111)
89
00 (00000000)
90
00 (00000000)
91
C0 (11000000)
92
00 (00000000)
93
00 (00000000)
94
00 (00000000)
95
00 (00000000)
APP-3
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
96
00 (00000000)
97
00 (00000000)
98
00 (00000000)
99
00 (00000000)
100
00 (00000000)
101
00 (00000000)
102
00 (00000000)
103
00 (00000000)
104
00 (00000000)
105
00 (00000000)
106
00 (00000000)
107
00 (00000000)
108
00 (00000000)
109
00 (00000000)
110
00 (00000000)
111
00 (00000000)
112
00 (00000000)
113
00 (00000000)
114
00 (00000000)
115
00 (00000000)
116
02 (00000010)
117
02 (00000010)
118
00 (00000000)
119
00 (00000000)
120
00 (00000000)
121
00 (00000000)
122
00 (00000000)
123
00 (00000000)
124
00 (00000000)
125
00 (00000000)
126
00 (00000000)
127
00 (00000000)
128
00 (00000000)
129
00 (00000000)
130
00 (00000000)
APP-4
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
131
00 (00000000)
132
00 (00000000)
133
00 (00000000)
134
00 (00000000)
135
00 (00000000)
136
00 (00000000)
137
00 (00000000)
138
00 (00000000)
139
00 (00000000)
140
00 (00000000)
141
00 (00000000)
142
00 (00000000)
143
00 (00000000)
144
00 (00000000)
145
00 (00000000)
146
00 (00000000)
147
00 (00000000)
148
00 (00000000)
149
00 (00000000)
150
00 (00000000)
151
00 (00000000)
152
00 (00000000)
153
00 (00000000)
154
00 (00000000)
155
00 (00000000)
156
00 (00000000)
157
00 (00000000)
158
00 (00000000)
159
00 (00000000)
160
00 (00000000)
161
00 (00000000)
162
00 (00000000)
163
00 (00000000)
164
00 (00000000)
165
00 (00000000)
APP-5
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
166
00 (00000000)
167
00 (00000000)
168
00 (00000000)
169
00 (00000000)
170
00 (00000000)
171
00 (00000000)
172
00 (00000000)
173
00 (00000000)
174
00 (00000000)
175
00 (00000000)
176
00 (00000000)
177
00 (00000000)
178
00 (00000000)
179
00 (00000000)
180
00 (00000000)
181
00 (00000000)
182
00 (00000000)
183
00 (00000000)
184
00 (00000000)
185
00 (00000000)
186
20 (00100000)
187
00 (00000000)
188
00 (00000000)
189
00 (00000000)
190
00 (00000000)
191
00 (00000000)
192
00 (00000000)
193
00 (00000000)
194
01 (00000001)
195
00 (00000000)
196
00 (00000000)
197
00 (00000000)
198
03 (00000011)
199
00 (00000000)
200
00 (00000000)
APP-6
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
201
00 (00000000)
202
00 (00000000)
203
00 (00000000)
204
00 (00000000)
205
00 (00000000)
206
00 (00000000)
207
00 (00000000)
208
00 (00000000)
209
80 (10000000)
210
00 (00000000)
211
00 (00000000)
212
00 (00000000)
213
00 (00000000)
214
00 (00000000)
215
00 (00000000)
216
00 (00000000)
217
00 (00000000)
218
00 (00000000)
219
00 (00000000)
220
00 (00000000)
221
00 (00000000)
222
00 (00000000)
223
00 (00000000)
224
00 (00000000)
225
00 (00000000)
226
00 (00000000)
227
00 (00000000)
228
00 (00000000)
229
00 (00000000)
230
00 (00000000)
231
00 (00000000)
232
00 (00000000)
233
00 (00000000)
234
00 (00000000)
235
00 (00000000)
APP-7
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
236
00 (00000000)
237
00 (00000000)
238
00 (00000000)
239
00 (00000000)
240
00 (00000000)
241
00 (00000000)
242
00 (00000000)
243
00 (00000000)
244
00 (00000000)
245
00 (00000000)
246
00 (00000000)
247
00 (00000000)
248
00 (00000000)
249
00 (00000000)
250
00 (00000000)
251
00 (00000000)
252
00 (00000000)
253
00 (00000000)
254
00 (00000000)
255
00 (00000000)
256
14 (00010100)
257
00 (00000000)
258
00 (00000000)
259
00 (00000000)
260
00 (00000000)
261
00 (00000000)
262
00 (00000000)
263
00 (00000000)
264
00 (00000000)
265
00 (00000000)
266
00 (00000000)
267
00 (00000000)
268
00 (00000000)
269
00 (00000000)
270
00 (00000000)
APP-8
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
271
00 (00000000)
272
00 (00000000)
273
00 (00000000)
274
00 (00000000)
275
00 (00000000)
276
00 (00000000)
277
00 (00000000)
278
00 (00000000)
279
00 (00000000)
280
00 (00000000)
281
00 (00000000)
282
00 (00000000)
283
00 (00000000)
284
00 (00000000)
285
00 (00000000)
286
00 (00000000)
287
00 (00000000)
288
00 (00000000)
289
00 (00000000)
290
00 (00000000)
291
00 (00000000)
292
00 (00000000)
293
00 (00000000)
294
00 (00000000)
295
00 (00000000)
296
00 (00000000)
297
00 (00000000)
298
00 (00000000)
299
00 (00000000)
300
00 (00000000)
301
00 (00000000)
302
00 (00000000)
303
00 (00000000)
304
00 (00000000)
305
00 (00000000)
APP-9
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
306
00 (00000000)
307
00 (00000000)
308
00 (00000000)
309
00 (00000000)
310
00 (00000000)
311
00 (00000000)
312
00 (00000000)
313
00 (00000000)
314
00 (00000000)
315
00 (00000000)
316
00 (00000000)
317
00 (00000000)
318
00 (00000000)
319
00 (00000000)
320
00 (00000000)
321
00 (00000000)
322
00 (00000000)
323
00 (00000000)
324
00 (00000000)
325
00 (00000000)
326
00 (00000000)
327
00 (00000000)
328
00 (00000000)
329
00 (00000000)
330
00 (00000000)
331
00 (00000000)
332
00 (00000000)
333
00 (00000000)
334
00 (00000000)
335
00 (00000000)
336
00 (00000000)
337
00 (00000000)
338
00 (00000000)
339
00 (00000000)
340
00 (00000000)
APP-10
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
341
00 (00000000)
342
00 (00000000)
343
00 (00000000)
344
00 (00000000)
345
00 (00000000)
346
00 (00000000)
347
00 (00000000)
348
00 (00000000)
349
00 (00000000)
350
00 (00000000)
351
00 (00000000)
352
00 (00000000)
353
00 (00000000)
354
00 (00000000)
355
00 (00000000)
356
00 (00000000)
357
00 (00000000)
358
00 (00000000)
359
00 (00000000)
360
00 (00000000)
361
00 (00000000)
362
00 (00000000)
363
00 (00000000)
364
00 (00000000)
365
00 (00000000)
366
00 (00000000)
367
00 (00000000)
368
00 (00000000)
369
00 (00000000)
370
00 (00000000)
371
00 (00000000)
372
00 (00000000)
373
00 (00000000)
374
00 (00000000)
375
00 (00000000)
APP-11
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
376
00 (00000000)
377
00 (00000000)
378
00 (00000000)
379
00 (00000000)
380
00 (00000000)
381
00 (00000000)
382
00 (00000000)
383
00 (00000000)
384
00 (00000000)
385
00 (00000000)
386
00 (00000000)
387
00 (00000000)
388
00 (00000000)
389
00 (00000000)
390
00 (00000000)
391
00 (00000000)
392
00 (00000000)
393
00 (00000000)
394
00 (00000000)
395
00 (00000000)
396
00 (00000000)
397
00 (00000000)
398
00 (00000000)
399
00 (00000000)
400
00 (00000000)
401
00 (00000000)
402
00 (00000000)
403
00 (00000000)
404
00 (00000000)
405
00 (00000000)
406
00 (00000000)
407
00 (00000000)
408
00 (00000000)
409
00 (00000000)
410
00 (00000000)
APP-12
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
411
00 (00000000)
412
00 (00000000)
413
00 (00000000)
414
00 (00000000)
415
00 (00000000)
416
00 (00000000)
417
00 (00000000)
418
00 (00000000)
419
00 (00000000)
420
00 (00000000)
421
00 (00000000)
422
00 (00000000)
423
00 (00000000)
424
00 (00000000)
425
00 (00000000)
426
00 (00000000)
427
00 (00000000)
428
00 (00000000)
429
00 (00000000)
430
00 (00000000)
431
00 (00000000)
432
00 (00000000)
433
00 (00000000)
434
00 (00000000)
435
00 (00000000)
436
00 (00000000)
437
00 (00000000)
438
00 (00000000)
439
00 (00000000)
440
00 (00000000)
441
00 (00000000)
442
00 (00000000)
443
00 (00000000)
444
00 (00000000)
445
00 (00000000)
APP-13
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
446
00 (00000000)
447
00 (00000000)
448
00 (00000000)
449
00 (00000000)
450
00 (00000000)
451
00 (00000000)
452
00 (00000000)
453
00 (00000000)
454
00 (00000000)
455
00 (00000000)
456
00 (00000000)
457
00 (00000000)
458
00 (00000000)
459
00 (00000000)
460
00 (00000000)
461
00 (00000000)
462
00 (00000000)
463
00 (00000000)
464
00 (00000000)
465
00 (00000000)
466
00 (00000000)
467
00 (00000000)
468
00 (00000000)
469
00 (00000000)
470
00 (00000000)
471
00 (00000000)
472
00 (00000000)
473
00 (00000000)
474
00 (00000000)
475
00 (00000000)
476
00 (00000000)
477
00 (00000000)
478
00 (00000000)
479
00 (00000000)
480
00 (00000000)
APP-14
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS1
INDEX
DATA
481
00 (00000000)
482
00 (00000000)
483
00 (00000000)
484
00 (00000000)
485
00 (00000000)
486
00 (00000000)
487
00 (00000000)
488
00 (00000000)
489
00 (00000000)
490
00 (00000000)
491
00 (00000000)
492
00 (00000000)
493
00 (00000000)
494
00 (00000000)
495
00 (00000000)
496
00 (00000000)
497
00 (00000000)
498
00 (00000000)
499
00 (00000000)
500
00 (00000000)
501
00 (00000000)
502
00 (00000000)
503
00 (00000000)
504
00 (00000000)
505
00 (00000000)
506
00 (00000000)
507
00 (00000000)
508
00 (00000000)
509
00 (00000000)
510
00 (00000000)
511
00 (00000000)
APP-15
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS2
INDEX
DATA
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
10
00 (00000000)
11
00 (00000000)
12
00 (00000000)
13
00 (00000000)
14
00 (00000000)
15
00 (00000000)
ASYD SYS3
INDEX
DATA
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
00 (00000000)
10
00 (00000000)
11
00 (00000000)
12
00 (00000000)
13
00 (00000000)
APP-16
APPENDIX
ASYD SYS3
INDEX
DATA
14
00 (00000000)
15
00 (00000000)
16
00 (00000000)
17
00 (00000000)
18
00 (00000000)
19
00 (00000000)
20
00 (00000000)
21
00 (00000000)
22
00 (00000000)
23
00 (00000000)
24
00 (00000000)
25
00 (00000000)
26
00 (00000000)
27
00 (00000000)
28
00 (00000000)
29
00 (00000000)
30
00 (00000000)
31
00 (00000000)
APP-17
APPENDIX
APP-18
Printed in Japan
0807-010

Installation PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Installation PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

FP85-104 S1

The telephone system can only be used in NEC-designated countries.

If lightning causes a fault, contact the dealer.

Observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries:

Do not place any equipment in the following environments:

Consider the following items before the installation.

Floor, Wall and Ceiling

Air Conditioning Facilities

The Earth Ground (E) from the Rectifier

The Frame Ground (FE) from the system

The Frame Ground (FE) from the MDF

2.2 Disposables and Periodic-replacement Parts

REGULATORY NOTICE (For North America)

TELEPHONE/SERVICE PROVIDER COMPANY NOTIFICATION

Your telephone number.

FCC registration number:

For SV8500 system, use the following number:

REPAIR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

PRIVATE (LEASED) LINES

TOLL RESTRICTION AND LEAST COST ROUTING EQUIPMENT

DIRECT INWARD DIALING

Note: ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE

FOR PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC RULES.

Answered by the called station.

Answered by the Attendant.

Routed to a dial prompt.

A busy tone is received.

A reorder tone is received.

VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT/MONITORING OVER DID LINES

EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY

ity granted by the FCC to operate the equipment.

4. INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS

CT-12 Headset Cordless

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.

CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.

CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE

REGULATORY NOTICE (For EU)

CE Notice (European Union)

ETS 300 011 (PRI)

ETS 300 012 (BRI)

ETS 300 402 (PRI & BRI)

ETS 300 403 (PRI & BRI)

TBR3 :ISDN basic rate interface

TBR4 :ISDN primary rate interface

TBR21 :Analogue interface

This is a class A product.

For countries in the European Union

For countries outside the European Union

NEC Philips S SS SV8500

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions

TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

SV8500, the system

SV7000, the system

UNIVERGE SV7000 Note 1

MPS, SV7000 MPS, the system

UNIVERGE SV7000 MPS

IPX, 2400 IPX, NEAX 2400 IPX, the system

NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange Note 2

IPS, 2000 IPS, NEAX 2000 IPS

NEAX2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER Note 3

NEAX IMX, IMX